Mercedes - C 200 - Owners Manual - 2015 - 2015

C-Class É2055844601FËÍ 2055844601 Order no. 6515 0935 13 Part no. 2055844601 Edition C-2015 C-Class Operator's Manual Operator's Manual Symbols Registered trademarks: RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc. RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG. RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls. RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. RBurmester is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation. RGracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC. In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols: This symbol indicates an instruction that must be followed. Several of these symbols in succesX sion indicate an instruction with several steps. This symbol tells you where you can (Y page) find more information about a topic. This symbol indicates a warning or an YY instruction that is continued on the next page. Dis‐ This font indicates a display in the play multifunction display/COMAND display. X Parts of the software in the vehicle are protected by copyright © 2005 The FreeType Project http://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved. Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) Editorial office ©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG. Vehicle manufacturer Daimler AG Mercedesstraße 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others. H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal. ! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you. As at 29.10.2013 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty. The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on: Rmodel Rorder Rcountry specification Android™ Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App may not yet be available in your country. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company Ravailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROperator's Manual Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. You can also use the C‑Class Guide smartphone App: RMaintenance Apple® iOS 2055844601 É2055844601FËÍ Contents Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 31 Introduction ......................................... 22 Safety ................................................... 41 Opening and closing ........................... 79 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 107 Lights and windshield wipers .......... 123 Climate control ................................. 137 Driving and parking .......................... 155 On-board computer and displays .... 229 Stowage and features ...................... 297 Maintenance and care ...................... 323 Roadside Assistance ........................ 339 Wheels and tires ............................... 357 Technical data ................................... 395 3 4 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 12 V socket see Sockets 360° camera Cleaning ......................................... 335 Function/notes ............................. 211 4ETS see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) .................................................. 199 A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 251 Function/notes ................................ 66 Important safety notes .................... 66 Warning lamp ................................. 286 Accident Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 59 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 143 Active Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 246 Display message ............................ 273 Function/information .................... 221 Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 246 Display message ............................ 272 Function/information .................... 224 Active Parking Assist Detecting parking spaces .............. 203 Display message ............................ 273 Exiting a parking space .................. 205 Function/notes ............................. 202 Important safety notes .................. 202 Parking .......................................... 204 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 74 Adaptive Brake Assist Function/notes ................................ 70 Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 198 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Display message ............................ 267 Function/notes ............................. 127 Switching on/off ........................... 128 Additional speedometer ................... 248 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 400 AGILITY SELECT switch Automatic transmission ................. 167 Climate control (3-zone automatic climate control) ............................. 142 Climate control (dual-zone automatic climate control) .................... 140 Air bags Deployment ..................................... 56 Display message ............................ 263 Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 49 Important safety notes .................... 48 Introduction ..................................... 48 Knee bag .......................................... 50 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 43 Side impact air bag .......................... 50 Window curtain air bag .................... 51 Air-conditioning system see Climate control AIRMATIC Display message ............................ 271 Function/notes ............................. 197 AIRPANEL (cleaning instructions) .... 334 Air vents Important safety notes .................. 152 Rear ............................................... 153 Setting ........................................... 152 Setting the center air vents ........... 152 Setting the side air vents ............... 153 Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 76 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 76 Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 76 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Anti-lock Braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Index Armrest Stowage compartment .................. 300 Ashtray ............................................... 309 Assistance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 243 Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 244 ASSYST PLUS Displaying a service message ........ 329 Hiding a service message .............. 328 Notes ............................................. 328 Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 329 Service message ............................ 328 Special service requirements ......... 329 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 76 Function ........................................... 76 Switching off the alarm .................... 76 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 246 Display message ............................ 271 Function/notes ............................. 216 Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Display message ............................ 266 see Lights Automatic car wash (care) ............... 330 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... 161 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... 161 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 124 Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ............. 167 AGILITY SELECT switch .................. 167 Changing gear ............................... 167 DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 164 Display message ............................ 280 Drive program ................................ 168 Drive program display .................... 166 Driving tips .................................... 167 Emergency running mode .............. 171 Engaging drive position .................. 166 Engaging neutral ............................ Engaging park position automatically ............................................... Engaging reverse gear ................... Engaging the park position ............ Kickdown ....................................... Manual shifting .............................. Overview ........................................ Problem (malfunction) ................... Pulling away ................................... Starting the engine ........................ Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... Transmission positions .................. Automatic transmission emergency mode ....................................... 165 165 165 164 167 169 164 171 160 159 169 166 166 171 B Backup lamp Changing bulbs .............................. 132 Bag hook ............................................ 304 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 67 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist (Brake Assist PLUS with CrossTraffic Assist) Function/notes ................................ 67 Important safety notes .................... 67 Battery (SmartKey) Checking .......................................... 84 Important safety notes .................... 83 Replacing ......................................... 84 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 347 Display message ............................ 268 Important safety notes .................. 345 Jump starting ................................. 349 Belt see Seat belts Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 246 Display message ............................ 273 Notes/function .............................. 217 see Active Blind Spot Assist Box (trunk) ......................................... 304 5 6 Index Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message ............................ 258 Notes ............................................. 401 Brake force distribution, electronic see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Brake lamps Display message ............................ 265 Brakes ABS .................................................. 66 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 70 BAS .................................................. 67 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist ............................................... 67 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 401 Display message ............................ 251 EBD .................................................. 73 Hill start assist ............................... 160 HOLD function ............................... 196 Important safety notes .................. 180 Maintenance .................................. 181 Parking brake ................................ 176 Riding tips ...................................... 180 Warning lamp ................................. 285 Breakdown see Flat tire see Towing away Brightness control (instrument cluster lighting) ................................... 32 Bulbs see Replacing bulbs Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 231 C California Important notice for retail customers and lessees .......................... 24 Calling up a malfunction see Display messages Camera see 360° camera Car see Vehicle Care 360° camera ................................. 335 AIRPANEL ...................................... 334 Carpets .......................................... 337 Car wash ........................................ 330 Display ........................................... 336 Exhaust pipe .................................. 335 Exterior lights ................................ 333 Gear or selector lever .................... 336 Interior ........................................... 336 Matte finish ................................... 332 Notes ............................................. 329 Paint .............................................. 332 Plastic trim .................................... 336 Power washer ................................ 331 Rear view camera .......................... 334 Roof lining ...................................... 337 Seat belt ........................................ 337 Seat cover ..................................... 337 Sensors ......................................... 334 Steering wheel ............................... 336 Trim pieces .................................... 336 Washing by hand ........................... 331 Wheels ........................................... 333 Windows ........................................ 333 Wiper blades .................................. 333 Wooden trim .................................. 336 Cargo tie down rings ......................... 303 Car key see SmartKey CD player/CD changer (on-board computer) .......................................... 241 Center console Lower section .................................. 37 Upper section .................................. 36 Central locking Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 81 Changing bulbs High-beam headlamps ................... 132 Low-beam headlamps .................... 131 Reversing lamps ............................ 132 Turn signals (front) ......................... 132 Turn signals (rear) .......................... 132 Child-proof locks Important safety notes .................... 64 Rear doors ....................................... 65 Index Children In the vehicle ................................... 59 Restraint systems ............................ 61 Special seat belt retractor ............... 60 Child seat Forward-facing restraint system ...... 64 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ............................................ 62 On the front-passenger seat ............ 63 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 64 Top Tether ....................................... 62 Cigarette lighter ................................ 309 Cleaning Mirror turn signal ........................... 334 Climate control Automatic climate control (3zone) .............................................. 141 Controlling automatically ............... 144 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 143 Defrosting the windows ................. 148 Defrosting the windshield .............. 147 Dual-zone automatic climate control ................................................. 139 ECO start/stop function (3-zone automatic climate control) ............. 142 ECO start/stop function (dualzone automatic climate control) .... 139 Important safety notes .................. 138 Indicator lamp ................................ 144 Information about using automatic climate control ..................... 142 Information about using dual-zone automatic climate control .............. 139 Ionization ....................................... 152 Overview of systems ...................... 138 Perfume atomizer .......................... 150 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 144 Problem with the rear window defroster ........................................ 149 Rear control panel ......................... 141 Refrigerant ..................................... 402 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 403 Setting the air distribution ............. 146 Setting the airflow ......................... 146 Setting the air vents ...................... 152 Setting the climate mode ............... 145 Setting the temperature ................ 145 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 149 Switching on/off ........................... 142 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 149 Switching the rear window defroster on/off ............................ 148 Switching the synchronization function on and off ........................ 147 Climate control system Automatic engine start .................. 161 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 161 Climate control (3-zone automatic climate control) ............................. 142 Deactivating/activating ................. 162 Important safety notes .................. 161 Introduction ................................... 161 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 32 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Activating/deactivating ................. 245 Display message ............................ 258 Operation/notes .............................. 69 COMAND display Cleaning ......................................... 336 Combination switch .......................... 126 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 237 Convenience box ............................... 304 Convenience closing feature .............. 99 Convenience opening feature ............ 98 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 327 Display message ............................ 267 Filling capacity ............................... 402 Important safety notes .................. 401 Temperature display in the instrument cluster .................................. 231 Temperature display in the onboard computer ............................. 244 Warning lamp ................................. 291 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ............................................. 29 7 8 Index Cornering light function Display message ............................ 264 Function/notes ............................. 127 Crash-responsive emergency lighting ....................................................... 130 Crosswind Assist ................................. 73 Cruise control Cruise control lever ....................... 184 Deactivating ................................... 185 Display message ............................ 276 Driving system ............................... 183 Function/notes ............................. 183 Important safety notes .................. 183 Setting a speed .............................. 185 Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 184 Cup holder Center console .............................. 307 Important safety notes .................. 306 Rear compartment ......................... 307 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ..................................................... 27 Customer Relations Department ....... 27 D Data see Technical data Daytime running lamps Display message ............................ 266 Function/notes ............................. 124 Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 247 Declarations of conformity ................. 26 Diagnostics connection ...................... 26 Digital speedometer ......................... 237 DIRECT SELECT lever Automatic transmission ................. 164 Display see Display messages see Warning and indicator lamps Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 328 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 250 Driving systems ............................. 271 Engine ............................................ 267 General notes ................................ 250 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 250 Introduction ................................... 250 Lights ............................................. 264 Safety systems .............................. 251 SmartKey ....................................... 282 Tires ............................................... 277 Vehicle ........................................... 280 Distance recorder ............................. 236 Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 293 Distance warning function Function/notes ................................ 69 DISTRONIC PLUS Activating ....................................... 188 Activation conditions ..................... 188 Cruise control lever ....................... 187 Deactivating ................................... 192 Display message ............................ 274 Displays in the multifunction display ................................................ 191 Driving tips .................................... 192 Function/notes ............................. 185 Important safety notes .................. 186 Selecting ........................................ 187 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 191 Doors Automatic locking (switch) ............... 88 Central locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ....................................... 81 Control panel ................................... 39 Display message ............................ 281 Emergency locking ........................... 89 Emergency unlocking ....................... 88 Important safety notes .................... 87 Opening (from inside) ...................... 87 Drinking and driving ......................... 178 Drive program Automatic transmission ................. 168 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 166 Driver's door see Doors Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 329 Symmetrical low beam .................. 124 Driving Assistance package ............. 221 Driving on flooded roads .................. 182 Index Driving safety system BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist ............................................... 67 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 66 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 74 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 70 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 67 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS ................................................ 69 Distance warning function ............... 69 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ............................................. 73 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 71 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ........................................... 72 Important safety information ........... 66 Overview .......................................... 66 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 74 STEER CONTROL ............................. 76 Driving systems 360°camera .................................. 211 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 221 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 224 Active Parking Assist ..................... 202 AIRMATIC ...................................... 197 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 216 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 217 Cruise control ................................ 183 Display message ............................ 271 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 185 DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 194 Driving Assistance package ........... 221 HOLD function ............................... 196 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 219 Lane Tracking package .................. 217 PARKTRONIC ................................. 199 Rear view camera .......................... 207 Driving tips Automatic transmission ................. 167 Brakes ........................................... 180 Break-in period .............................. 156 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 192 Downhill gradient ........................... 180 Drinking and driving ....................... 178 Driving abroad ............................... Driving in winter ............................. Driving on flooded roads ................ Driving on wet roads ...................... Exhaust check ............................... Fuel ................................................ General .......................................... Hydroplaning ................................. Icy road surfaces ........................... Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... Snow chains .................................. Symmetrical low beam .................. The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... Wet road surface ........................... DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... 124 182 182 182 178 178 178 182 182 181 361 124 156 181 241 E EASY-ENTRY feature Function/notes ............................. 116 EASY-EXIT feature Function/notes ............................. 116 EASY-PACK trunk box ....................... 304 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 254 Function/notes ................................ 73 ECO display Function/notes ............................. 179 On-board computer ....................... 236 ECO start/stop function Climate control (dual-zone automatic climate control) .................... 140 General information ....................... 161 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 59 Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 88 Trunk ............................................... 97 Vehicle ............................................. 88 Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation ......................................... 56 9 10 Index Emissions control Service and warranty information .... 23 Engine Check Engine warning lamp ........... 291 Display message ............................ 267 ECO start/stop function ................ 161 Engine number ............................... 397 Irregular running ............................ 163 Jump-starting ................................. 349 Starting problems .......................... 163 Starting the engine with the SmartKey ....................................... 159 Starting with the Start/Stop button ................................................. 159 Switching off .................................. 175 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 354 Engine electronics Problem (malfunction) ................... 163 Engine oil Adding ........................................... 326 Additives ........................................ 400 Checking the oil level ..................... 325 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 325 Display message ............................ 269 Filling capacity ............................... 400 Notes about oil grades ................... 400 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 325 Viscosity ........................................ 400 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Characteristics ................................. 72 Deactivating/activating ................... 72 Display message ............................ 251 ETS/4ETS ........................................ 72 Function/notes ................................ 71 General notes .................................. 71 Important safety information ........... 72 Warning lamp ................................. 288 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 72 Exhaust see Exhaust pipe Exhaust check ................................... 178 Exhaust pipe Cleaning ......................................... 335 Exterior lighting Cleaning ......................................... see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... Dipping (automatic) ....................... Folding in/out (automatically) ....... Folding in/out (electrically) ........... Out of position (troubleshooting) ... Setting ........................................... Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... Storing the parking position .......... Eyeglasses compartment ................. 333 118 119 118 118 119 118 121 119 299 F Features ............................................. 306 Filler cap see Fuel filler flap Flat tire Changing a wheel/mounting the spare wheel ................................... 381 MOExtended tires .......................... 341 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 341 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 342 Floormats ........................................... 322 Fording On flooded roads ........................... 182 Fuel Additives ........................................ 399 Consumption information .............. 399 Consumption statistics .................. 237 Displaying the current consumption ................................................ 236 Displaying the range ...................... 236 Driving tips .................................... 178 Fuel gauge ....................................... 33 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 398 Important safety notes .................. 398 Problem (malfunction) ................... 174 Refueling ........................................ 171 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 398 Fuel filler flap Opening ......................................... 172 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 236 Index Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ Problem (malfunction) ................... Fuses Allocation chart ............................. Before changing ............................. Dashboard fuse box ....................... Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell .......................................... Fuse box in the trunk ..................... Important safety notes .................. 398 174 356 354 355 355 355 356 354 G Garage door opener Clearing the memory ..................... 321 General notes ................................ 318 Important safety notes .................. 319 Opening/closing the garage door .. 321 Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... 319 Gasoline ............................................. 398 Genuine parts ...................................... 22 Glove box ........................................... 299 H Handbrake see Parking brake HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 93 Hazard warning lamps ...................... 127 Headlamps Cleaning system (notes) ................ 402 Fogging up ..................................... 128 see Automatic headlamp mode Head restraints Adjusting ....................................... 111 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 112 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 111 Adjusting (rear) .............................. 112 Installing/removing (rear) .............. 112 Head-up display Adjusting the brightness ................ 247 Function/notes ............................. 233 Important safety notes .................. 233 Setting the position ....................... 247 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 121 Switching on or off ......................... 234 Switching the display on/off ......... 246 Heating see Climate control High beam flasher ............................. 126 High-beam headlamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 127 Changing bulbs .............................. 132 Display message ............................ 265 Switching on/off ........................... 126 Hill start assist .................................. 160 HOLD function Activating ....................................... 197 Deactivating ................................... 197 Display message ............................ 274 Function/notes ............................. 196 Hood Closing ........................................... 325 Display message ............................ 281 Important safety notes .................. 324 Opening ......................................... 324 Horn ...................................................... 32 Hydroplaning ..................................... 182 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobilizer .......................................... 76 Indicator and warning lamps COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS .............................................. 293 Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators see Turn signals Insect protection on the radiator .... 325 Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 33 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 230 Interior lighting Control ........................................... 129 Emergency lighting ........................ 130 11 12 Index Overview ........................................ 129 Reading lamp ................................. 129 J Jack Using ............................................. 382 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 349 K KEYLESS-GO Convenience closing feature ............ 99 Deactivation ..................................... 81 Locking ............................................ 81 Unlocking ......................................... 81 Key positions SmartKey ....................................... 157 Start/Stop button .......................... 157 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 167 Knee bag .............................................. 50 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ Display message ............................ Function/information .................... see Active Lane Keeping Assist Lane Tracking package ..................... LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ................................................ License plate lamp (display message) ................................................... Light function, active Display message ............................ Lights Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. Automatic headlamp mode ............ Cornering light function ................. Driving abroad ............................... Fogged up headlamps .................... Hazard warning lamps ................... High beam flasher .......................... 246 272 219 217 62 265 266 127 124 127 124 128 127 126 High-beam headlamps ................... 126 Light switch ................................... 124 Low-beam headlamps .................... 125 Parking lamps ................................ 126 Rear fog lamp ................................ 125 Setting exterior lighting ................. 124 Standing lamps .............................. 126 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 247 Turn signals ................................... 126 see Interior lighting see Replacing bulbs Light sensor (display message) ....... 266 Loading guidelines ............................ 298 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 88 Emergency locking ........................... 89 From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 87 Locking centrally see Central locking Low-beam headlamps Changing bulbs .............................. 131 Display message ............................ 264 Setting for driving abroad (symmetrical) ........................................ 124 Switching on/off ........................... 125 Lumbar support Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 112 M M+S tires ............................................ Maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction message see Display messages Matte finish (cleaning instructions) .................................................. mbrace Call priority .................................... Display message ............................ Downloading destinations (COMAND) ..................................... 360 332 314 258 315 Index Downloading routes ....................... 318 Emergency call .............................. 312 General notes ................................ 310 Geo fencing ................................... 318 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 317 MB info call button ........................ 314 Remote vehicle locking .................. 316 Roadside Assistance button .......... 313 Search & Send ............................... 315 Self-test ......................................... 311 Speed alert .................................... 318 System .......................................... 311 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 318 Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis .............................................. 317 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 316 Mechanical key Function/notes ................................ 83 Inserting .......................................... 83 Locking vehicle ................................ 89 Removing ......................................... 83 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 88 Memory card (audio) ......................... 241 Memory function Seats, steering wheel, exterior mirrors ........................................... 120 Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive 360°camera .................................. 211 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 221 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 224 Active Parking Assist ..................... 202 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 216 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 217 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 185 DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 194 General notes ................................ 183 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 219 PARKTRONIC ................................. 199 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 58 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. 58 Rear view camera .......................... 207 Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. 250 Messages see Display messages see Warning and indicator lamps Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) Mirror turn signal Cleaning ......................................... 334 Mobile phone Menu (on-board computer) ............ 242 Modifying the programming (SmartKey) ........................................... 82 MOExtended tires .............................. 341 Mounting wheels Lowering the vehicle ...................... 386 Mounting a new wheel ................... 385 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 381 Raising the vehicle ......................... 382 Removing a wheel .......................... 385 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ 382 MP3 Operation ....................................... 241 Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 233 Permanent display ......................... 248 Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer .. 231 Overview .......................................... 35 N Navigation Menu (on-board computer) ............ 238 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ....................................................... 156 O Occupant Classification System (OCS) Conditions ....................................... 51 Faults ............................................... 55 13 14 Index Operation ......................................... 52 System self-test ............................... 54 Occupant safety Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 59 Children in the vehicle ..................... 59 Important safety notes .................... 43 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 65 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 58 Seat belt .......................................... 44 OCS Conditions ....................................... 51 Faults ............................................... 55 Operation ......................................... 52 System self-test ............................... 54 Odometer ........................................... 236 Oil see Engine oil On-board computer Assistance graphic menu ............... 243 Assistance menu ........................... 244 Displaying a service message ........ 329 Display messages .......................... 250 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 191 Factory settings ............................. 249 Head-up display ............................. 233 Important safety notes .................. 230 Instrument cluster menu ............... 248 Lights menu ................................... 247 Media menu ................................... 240 Menu overview .............................. 235 Message memory .......................... 250 Navigation menu ............................ 238 Operation ....................................... 231 Radio menu ................................... 240 Service menu ................................. 244 Settings menu ............................... 244 Standard display ............................ 236 Telephone menu ............................ 242 Trip menu ...................................... 236 Video DVD operation ..................... 241 Opening and closing the side trim panels ................................................. 132 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 26 Important safety notes .................... 25 Operating system see On-board computer Operator's Manual Overview .......................................... 23 Vehicle equipment ........................... 23 Outside temperature display ........... 231 Overhead control panel ...................... 38 Override feature Rear side windows ........................... 65 P Paint code number ............................ 396 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 332 Panic alarm .......................................... 42 Panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel Important safety notes .................. 101 Opening/closing ............................ 103 Problem (malfunction) ................... 106 Resetting ....................................... 105 Parking Important safety notes .................. 174 Parking brake ................................ 176 Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 119 Rear view camera .......................... 207 see PARKTRONIC Parking aid Active Parking Assist ..................... 202 see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC Parking assistance see PARKTRONIC Parking brake Display message ............................ 254 Electric parking brake .................... 176 Warning lamp ................................. 290 Parking lamps Switching on/off ........................... 126 PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 201 Driving system ............................... 199 Function/notes ............................. 199 Important safety notes .................. 199 Problem (malfunction) ................... 202 Index Range of the sensors ..................... 199 Warning display ............................. 200 PASSENGER AIR BAG Indicator lamps ................................ 43 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp Problem (malfunction) ................... 263 Perfume atomizer Operating ....................................... 150 Perfume vial ................................... 150 Problem (malfunction) ................... 152 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 65 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 336 Power washers .................................. 331 Power windows see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Display message ............................ 259 Operation ......................................... 58 PRE-SAFE® Brake Activating/deactivating ................. 245 Display message ............................ 259 Function/notes ................................ 74 Important safety notes .................... 74 Warning lamp ................................. 293 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) Operation ......................................... 58 Protection against theft ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 76 Immobilizer ...................................... 76 Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 22 Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. 160 Hill start assist ............................... 160 Q Qualified specialist workshop ........... 26 R Radiator cover ................................... 325 Radio Selecting a station ......................... 240 Radio-wave reception/transmission in the vehicle Declaration of conformity ................ 26 Reading lamp ..................................... 129 Rear compartment Setting the airflow ......................... 146 Setting the air vents ...................... 153 Setting the temperature ................ 145 Rear fog lamp Switching on/off ........................... 125 Rear lamps see Lights Rear seat (folding the backrest forwards/back) ...................................... 302 Rear seats Display message ............................ 281 Rear view camera Cleaning instructions ..................... 334 Function/notes ............................. 207 Switching on/off ........................... 208 Rear-view mirror Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 117 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 119 Rear window blind ............................ 308 Rear window defroster Problem (malfunction) ................... 149 Switching on/off ........................... 148 Recuperation display ........................ 236 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) Important safety notes .................. 402 Refueling Fuel gauge ....................................... 33 Important safety notes .................. 171 Refueling process .......................... 172 see Fuel Remote control Garage door opener ....................... 318 Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... 319 Replacing bulbs General notes ................................ 130 Important safety notes .................. 130 Overview of bulb types .................. 130 Removing/replacing the cover (front wheel arch) .......................... 131 Reporting safety defects .................... 27 15 16 Index Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 270 Warning lamp ................................. 291 Residual heat (climate control) ........ 149 Restraint system Display message ............................ 260 Introduction ..................................... 42 Warning lamp ................................. 290 Warning lamp (function) ................... 43 Reversing feature Panorama sliding sunroof .............. 102 Roller sunblinds ............................. 104 Side windows ................................... 97 Sliding sunroof ............................... 102 Trunk lid ........................................... 91 Reversing lamps (display message) ................................................... 266 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 24 Roller sunblind Panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel .................................. 104 Rear side windows ......................... 308 Rear window .................................. 308 Roller sunblinds (panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel) Operating ....................................... 105 Roof carrier ........................................ 306 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... 337 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 403 S Safety Children in the vehicle ..................... Child restraint systems .................... Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... see Operating safety Safety system see Driving safety systems Seat belts Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... Adjusting the height ......................... 59 61 51 47 46 center rear-compartment seat ......... 47 Cleaning ......................................... 337 Correct usage .................................. 45 Fastening ......................................... 46 Important safety guidelines ............. 44 Introduction ..................................... 44 Releasing ......................................... 47 Warning lamp ................................. 284 Warning lamp (function) ................... 48 Seats Adjusting (electrically) ................... 110 Adjusting (manually and electrically) .............................................. 110 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 112 Adjusting the head restraint .......... 111 Cleaning the cover ......................... 337 Correct driver's seat position ........ 108 Important safety notes .................. 109 Seat heating .................................. 112 Seat heating problem .................... 114 Seat ventilation .............................. 114 Seat ventilation problem ................ 115 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 121 Switching seat heating on/off ....... 112 Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 114 Selector lever Cleaning ......................................... 336 see Automatic transmission Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 334 Service menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 244 Service products Brake fluid ..................................... 401 Coolant (engine) ............................ 401 Engine oil ....................................... 400 Fuel ................................................ 397 Important safety notes .................. 397 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) ............................................... 402 Washer fluid ................................... 402 Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 249 On-board computer ....................... 244 Side impact air bag ............................. 50 Index Side marker lamp (display message) ................................................... 266 Side windows Cleaning ......................................... 333 Convenience closing feature ............ 99 Convenience opening feature .......... 98 Important safety information ........... 97 Opening/closing .............................. 98 Problem (malfunction) ................... 101 Resetting ......................................... 99 Sliding sunroof Opening/closing ............................ 102 Resetting ....................................... 103 see Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel SmartKey Changing the battery ....................... 84 Changing the programming ............. 82 Checking the battery ....................... 84 Convenience closing feature ............ 99 Convenience opening feature .......... 98 Display message ............................ 282 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 81 Important safety notes .................... 80 KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 82 Loss ................................................. 85 Mechanical key ................................ 83 Overview .......................................... 80 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 157 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 85 Starting the engine ........................ 159 Snow chains ...................................... 361 Sockets Center console .............................. 310 General notes ................................ 310 Rear compartment ......................... 310 Specialist workshop ............................ 26 Special seat belt retractor .................. 60 Speed, controlling see Cruise control Speedometer Activating/deactivating the additional speedometer ........................ 248 Digital ............................................ 237 In the Instrument cluster ................. 33 Segments ...................................... 231 Selecting the unit of measurement .............................................. 248 see Instrument cluster Standing lamps Display message ............................ 266 Switching on/off ........................... 126 Start/Stop button Starting the engine ........................ 159 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starting (engine) ................................ 159 STEER CONTROL .................................. 76 Steering Warning lamps ............................... 295 Steering (display message) .............. 281 Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot (DISTRONIC PLUS) Display message ............................ 276 Steering assistant STEER CONTROL see STEER CONTROL Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ................... 116 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 115 Button overview ............................... 35 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 231 Cleaning ......................................... 336 EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 116 Important safety notes .................. 115 Paddle shifters ............................... 169 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 121 Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 169 Stowage areas ................................... 298 Stowage compartments Armrest (under) ............................. 300 Center console .............................. 299 Cup holders ................................... 306 Door ............................................... 300 Eyeglasses compartment ............... 299 Glove box ....................................... 299 Important safety information ......... 298 Map pockets .................................. 300 Rear ............................................... 300 Stowage net ................................... 300 Stowage net ....................................... 300 17 18 Index Stowage well beneath the trunk floor .................................................... Summer tires In winter ........................................ Sun visor ............................................ Suspension tuning AIRMATIC ...................................... Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ................................................. 305 360 307 198 149 T Tachometer ........................................ 231 Tail lamps Display message ............................ 265 see Lights Tank content Fuel gauge ....................................... 33 Technical data Capacities ...................................... 397 Information .................................... 396 Tires/wheels ................................. 386 Vehicle data ................................... 403 Telephone Accepting a call (multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 242 Display message ............................ 282 Introduction ................................... 242 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 242 Number from the phone book ........ 243 Redialing ........................................ 243 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 242 Temperature Coolant (display in the instrument cluster) .......................................... 231 Coolant (display in the on-board computer) ...................................... 244 Outside temperature ...................... 231 Setting (climate control) ................ 145 Through-loading feature ................... 301 TIREFIT kit .......................................... 342 Tire pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 365 Checking manually ........................ 365 Display message ............................ 277 Important safety notes .................. 365 Maximum ....................................... 364 Notes ............................................. Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... Recommended ............................... Tire pressure loss warning system General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Restarting ...................................... Tire pressure monitor Checking the tire pressure electronically ........................................ Function/notes ............................. General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor ........................... Restarting ...................................... Warning lamp ................................. Warning message .......................... Tires Aspect ratio (definition) ................. Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... Bar (definition) ............................... Changing a wheel .......................... Characteristics .............................. Checking ........................................ Curb weight (definition) ................. Definition of terms ......................... Direction of rotation ...................... Display message ............................ Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) ............................ DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................... DOT (Department of Transportation) (definition) ............................. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) ..................................... GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) ........................................... GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) .............................. Important safety notes .................. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ...... Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 363 344 344 361 368 368 369 367 365 365 365 368 367 294 367 380 379 378 381 378 359 380 378 381 277 381 378 379 379 379 379 358 379 379 Index Labeling (overview) ........................ Load bearing index (definition) ...... Load index ..................................... Load index (definition) ................... Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) ..................................... Maximum load on a tire (definition) ............................................... Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) ............................. Maximum tire load ......................... Maximum tire load (definition) ....... MOExtended tires .......................... Optional equipment weight (definition) ............................................ PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) ........................................... Replacing ....................................... Service life ..................................... Sidewall (definition) ....................... Speed rating (definition) ................ Storing ........................................... Structure and characteristics (definition) ..................................... Summer tires in winter .................. Temperature .................................. TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) ..................................... Tire bead (definition) ...................... Tire pressure (definition) ................ Tire pressures (recommended) ...... Tire size (data) ............................... Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating .................... Tire tread ....................................... Tire tread (definition) ..................... Total load limit (definition) ............. Traction ......................................... Traction (definition) ....................... Tread wear ..................................... Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ...................................... Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) .................... Wear indicator (definition) ............. Wheel and tire combination ........... Wheel rim (definition) .................... see Flat tire 375 380 377 379 379 380 380 377 380 360 380 380 381 360 380 379 381 378 360 374 380 380 380 379 386 375 359 380 381 374 380 374 373 379 380 388 379 Top Tether ............................................ 62 Towing away Important safety guidelines ........... 351 Installing the towing eye ................ 352 Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 354 Removing the towing eye ............... 353 With both axles on the ground ....... 353 With the rear axle raised ................ 353 Towing eye ......................................... 340 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 354 Important safety notes .................. 351 Transfer case ..................................... 171 Transmission see Automatic transmission Transmission position display ......... 166 Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 166 Transporting the vehicle .................. 353 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 336 Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. 237 Trip odometer Calling up ....................................... 236 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 237 Trunk Emergency release .......................... 96 Important safety notes .................... 90 Locking separately ........................... 96 Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ...................................... 95 Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 92 Opening/closing (from outside, HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 93 Opening/closing (manually from outside) ............................................ 91 Opening (automatically from inside) .............................................. 95 Opening (automatically from outside) ................................................. 93 Trunk lid Display message ............................ 280 Obstacle recognition ........................ 91 Opening/closing .............................. 90 Opening dimensions ...................... 403 19 20 Index Trunk load (maximum) ...................... Turn signals Changing bulbs (front) ................... Changing bulbs (rear) .................... Display message ............................ Switching on/off ........................... Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate 403 132 132 264 126 U Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 88 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 87 V Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 308 Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 27 Data acquisition ............................... 28 Display message ............................ 280 Equipment ....................................... 23 Individual settings .......................... 244 Limited Warranty ............................. 27 Loading .......................................... 369 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 89 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 81 Lowering ........................................ 386 Maintenance .................................... 24 Operating safety .............................. 25 Parking for a long period ................ 177 Pulling away ................................... 160 Raising ........................................... 382 Reporting problems ......................... 27 Securing from rolling away ............ 382 Towing away .................................. 351 Transporting .................................. 353 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 88 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 81 Vehicle data ................................... 403 Vehicle data Roof load (maximum) ..................... 403 Trunk load (maximum) ................... 403 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 403 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 89 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. Vehicle level AIRMATIC ...................................... Display message ............................ Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Vehicle tool kit .................................. Video Operating the DVD ......................... VIN ...................................................... 396 198 271 340 241 396 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ 286 Brakes ........................................... 285 Check Engine ................................. 291 Coolant .......................................... 291 Distance warning ........................... 293 ESP® .............................................. 288 ESP® OFF ....................................... 289 Overview .......................................... 34 Parking brake ................................ 290 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 43 Reserve fuel ................................... 291 Restraint system ............................ 290 Seat belt ........................................ 284 Steering ......................................... 295 Tire pressure monitor .................... 294 Warranty .............................................. 23 Washer fluid Display message ............................ 282 Wheel and tire combination see Tires Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 386 Wheel chock ...................................... 382 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 381 Checking ........................................ 359 Cleaning ......................................... 333 Important safety notes .................. 358 Interchanging/changing ................ 381 Mounting a new wheel ................... 385 Mounting a wheel .......................... 381 Removing a wheel .......................... 385 Index Storing ........................................... 381 Tightening torque ........................... 386 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 386 Window curtain air bag Display message ............................ 261 Operation ......................................... 51 Windows see Side windows Windshield Defrosting ...................................... 147 Windshield washer fluid see Windshield washer system Windshield washer system Adding washer fluid ....................... 327 Notes ............................................. 402 Windshield wipers Problem (malfunction) ................... 136 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 134 Switching on/off ........................... 133 Winter driving Important safety notes .................. 360 Slippery road surfaces ................... 182 Snow chains .................................. 361 Winter operation Radiator cover ............................... 325 Summer tires ................................. 360 Winter tires M+S tires ....................................... 360 Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... 333 Important safety notes .................. 134 Replacing ....................................... 134 Replacing (windshield) ................... 134 Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 336 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop 21 22 Introduction Protection of the environment General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- sumption. make sure that the tire pressures are correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rremove roof racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Ralways Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Ravoid Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. off the engine in stationary traffic. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rswitch Environmental concerns and recommendations Wherever the operating instructions require you to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-use them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi- ces, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars sills Rseats Rcockpit Rinstrument cluster Rcenter console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop. Rdoor Introduction You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Every part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should therefore be used. More than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering genuine MercedesBenz parts (Y page 396). The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Service and vehicle operation Warranty The implied warranty for your vehicle applies in accordance with the warranty terms and conditions in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the following warranty terms and conditions: Operator's Manual Vehicle Limited Warranty System Warranty REmission Performance Warranty RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws) Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Vehicle equipment i Should you lose your Service and War- This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase agreement lists all systems installed in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RNew REmission ranty Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and Warranty Information booklet will be posted to you. Z 23 24 Introduction Information for customers in California Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if after a reasonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair, (2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for its repair, or (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days. Please send your written notice to: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Maintenance The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be done at regular intervals. Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in your vehicle literature portfolio. Change of address or change of ownership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service Center (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in Introduction the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that: Rservice facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available. Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic converter may not be available. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses. In the USA Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs curb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb or a hole in the road heavy object strikes the undercarriage or parts of the chassis Ra Z 25 26 Introduction In situations like this, the body, the undercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. Declarations of conformity Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device." Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you connect equipment to the diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of the vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety. Introduction Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Ralterations, installation work and modifications Rwork on electronic components Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual Technical Data section in this manual Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Rthe Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one of the following addresses. In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Reporting safety defects USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov Limited Warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. Z 27 28 Introduction Data stored in the vehicle Data recording This vehicle is capable of recording diagnostic information relating to vehicle operation, malfunctions, and user settings. This may include information about the performance or status of various systems, including but not limited to, engine, throttle, steering or brake systems, that is stored and can be read out with suitable devices, particularly when the vehicle is serviced. The data obtained is used to properly diagnose and service your vehicle or to further optimize and develop vehicle functions. COMAND/mbrace If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or mbrace, additional data about the vehicle’s operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace system. For additional information please refer to the COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Conditions. Event data recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as during air bag deployment or when hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: Rhow various systems in your vehicle are operating Rwhether or not the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and fast the vehicle is traveling This data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, can combine the EDR data with the type of personal identification data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems. Rhow Introduction State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs. Information on copyright General information Information on license for free and opensource software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ opensource Z 29 30 31 Cockpit ................................................. 32 Multifunction steering wheel ............. 35 Center console .................................... 36 Overhead control panel ...................... 38 Door control panel .............................. 39 At a glance Instrument cluster .............................. 33 32 Cockpit At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Steering wheel paddle shifters 169 ; Combination switch 126 = Horn ? Instrument cluster A DIRECT SELECT lever 164 B Climate control systems 138 C Overhead control panel 38 D Control panel for COMAND and vehicle functions 36 E Ignition lock Start/Stop button 157 157 F Adjusts the steering wheel 115 G Cruise control lever 184 33 Function Page H Electric parking brake I Diagnostics connection J Opens the hood 324 K Light switch 124 L Control panel for: Activating Steering Assist Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist Deactivating PARKTRONIC Switching on 360° camera Switching on the head-up display Vehicles without a driver assistance system: map/ coin holder 176 26 194 224 199 211 233 Instrument cluster 33 Instrument cluster Function At a glance Displays Page : Speedometer ; Multifunction display 233 = Tachometer 231 Function ? Coolant temperature display A Fuel gauge Page 231 34 Instrument cluster At a glance Warning and indicator lamps Function Page Function Page : å ESP® OFF 288 H J Brakes (yellow) ; ÷ ESP® 288 I 6 Restraint system = · Distance warning 293 J ü Seat belt 284 ? Ð Power steering 295 K A #! Turn signals 126 K High-beam headlamps 126 B ! Electric parking brake (yellow) L 290 L Low-beam headlamps 125 C ! ABS 286 M 8 Reserve fuel 291 D ; Check Engine 291 N E Electric parking brake (red) F USA only ! Canada only 290 T Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting 126 Brakes (red) $ USA only J Canada only 285 ? Coolant 291 F G 285 42 O N This lamp has no function P R Rear fog lamps 125 Q h Tire pressure monitor 294 Multifunction steering wheel 35 At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Audio 20/COMAND Online display; see the separate operating instructions = ~ Rejects or ends a call Exits phone book/redial memory 6 Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume 8 Mute ó Switches on the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions Page 233 242 Function ? ò Calls up the main menu 9: Selects a menu/submenu or scrolls through lists a Confirms your selection Hides display messages % Back ñ Switches off the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions Page 231 231 250 231 36 Center console At a glance Center console Center console, upper section Function Page : Climate control systems 138 ; £ Hazard warning lamps 127 = Vehicle functions/system settings button (see the separate Operator's Manual) ? A Telephone button (see the separate Operator's Manual) PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ATA indicator lamp 43 76 Function B Analog clock C Media button (see the separate Operator's Manual) D Radio button (see the separate Operator's Manual) E Navigation button (see the separate Operator's Manual) F þ Inserts/removes a CD/DVD; see the separate Operator's Manual) Page Center console 37 At a glance Center console, lower section Function Page : Cup holder 306 ; Function Page C Adjusts the volume/mute (see the separate Operator's Manual) u Rear window roller sunblind 308 D É Sets the vehicle level 197 = Switches audio/COMAND on/off; see the separate Operator's Manual E AGILITY SELECT switch 167 F Back button (see the separate Operator's Manual) ? è ECO start/stop function G A Touchpad (see the separate Operator's Manual) Audio 20/COMAND controller (see the separate Operator's Manual) H B Stowage compartment g Switches to the favorites button (see the separate Operator's Manual) 161 298 38 Overhead control panel At a glance Overhead control panel Function Page : p Switches the lefthand reading lamp on/off 129 ; | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off 129 = G SOS button (mbrace system) 312 ? c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 129 A u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off 129 B p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 129 C ï MB Info call button (mbrace system) 314 D Eyeglasses compartment 299 Function E Page 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Opens/closes the roller sunblinds 103 F Rear-view mirror 117 G Buttons for the garage door opener 319 H Microphone for mbrace (emergency call system), telephone and the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions I F Roadside Assistance call button (mbrace system) 104 313 Door control panel 39 At a glance Door control panel Function : Page Function E r45= Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering wheel 120 ; Adjusts the seats electrically 110 = c Seat heating 112 ? s Seat ventilation 114 A Opens the door 87 B % & Unlocks/locks the vehicle 87 C W Opens/closes the rear left side window 97 D W Opens/closes the left side window 97 7Zª\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically Page 118 F W Opens/closes the right side window 97 G W Opens/closes the rear right side window 97 H n Override feature for the controls in the rear compartment 65 p Opens/closes the trunk lid 95 I 40 41 Useful information .............................. 42 Panic alarm .......................................... 42 Occupant safety .................................. 42 Pets in the vehicle .............................. 65 Driving safety systems ....................... 66 Protection against theft ..................... 76 Safety Children in the vehicle ........................ 59 Occupant safety 42 Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all Safety models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). Panic alarm Occupant safety Restraint system: introduction The restraint system reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. The restraint system can also reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. The restraint system comprises: RSeat belt system bags RChild restraint system RChild seat securing systems The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only deploy their protective function if, at all times, all vehicle occupants: RAir Rhave To activate: press ! button : for at least one second. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. X To deactivate: press ! button : again. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Press the Start/Stop button. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. X fastened their seat belts correctly (Y page 45) Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint properly (Y page 109). As the driver, you also have to make sure that the steering wheel is adjusted correctly. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 108). You also have to make sure that an air bag can inflate properly if deployed (Y page 48). An air bag supplements a correctly fastened seat belt and is an additional safety device providing increased protection for vehicle occupants in appropriate accident situations. For example, if, in the event of an accident, the protection offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only the air bags that increase protection in that particular accident situation are deployed. However, seat belts and air bags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. Information on restraint system operation can be found under "Triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Device and air bags" (Y page 56). For more information about children traveling with you in the vehicle and on child restraint systems, see "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 59). Important safety notes G WARNING Modifications to the restraint system may cause it to no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function and may fail in an accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic components or their software. If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for further information contact our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372). Restraint system warning lamp The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at regular intervals while the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the engine is started. The components of the restraint system are in operational readiness. A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the engine running Rlights up again while the engine is running G WARNING If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emergency Tensioning Device or air bag, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are part of the Occupant Classification System (OCS). The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON : lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front air bag is deployed. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ; lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. They will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. Z 43 Safety Occupant safety 44 Occupant safety Safety Depending on the person in the frontpassenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag must either be disabled or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a child restraint system: whether the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated depends on the installed child restraint system, and the age and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe the notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 59). There you will also find instructions on backwards- and forwards-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat. RAll other persons: depending on the classification of the person in the frontpassenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated (Y page 51). Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts“ (Y page 44) and "Air bags" (Y page 48). There you can also find information on the correct seat position. Seat belts Introduction A correctly fastened seat belt is the most effective means of restraining the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident or overturn. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being thrown from the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupants in the best position in relation to the air bag. The seat belt system consists of: RSeat belts REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear compartment RBelt force limiters for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear If the seat belt is pulled quickly or suddenly from the belt sash guide, the inertia reel locks. The belt strap cannot be pulled out further. Emergency Tensioning Devices tighten the seat belts in an accident, pulling them close against the occupant's body. They do not, however, pull vehicle occupants back towards the backrest. Emergency Tensioning Devices do not correct an incorrect seat position or incorrectly worn seat belts. When activated, the belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupants. The belt force limiters for the front seats are synchronized with the front air bags, which absorb part of the deceleration force. This makes it possible to reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. ! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle of the front-passenger seat. This may otherwise lead to the triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Device in the event of an accident, which will then need to be replaced. Important safety notes The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey. G WARNING If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause additional injury, for example, in an accident, dur- ing braking or when abruptly changing direction. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants are seated properly with a correctly fastened seat belt. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. G WARNING Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot fasten the seat belt correctly without an additional suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause additional injury, for example, in an accident, during braking or an abrupt change of direction. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. For this reason, always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint systems. If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Children in the vehicle" section of this Operator's Manual (Y page 59) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 51) G WARNING The seat belts may not perform their intended protective function if: Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely dirty, bleach or dyed Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels have been modified Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels. Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn out and clean. Following an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Any such modifications could invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. Proper use of the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 44). All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also make sure that all vehicle occupants are always wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle is in motion. Z 45 Safety Occupant safety 46 Occupant safety When fastening the seat belt, always make sure that: Safety Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belt buckle belonging to that seat. Rthe seat belt is tight across your body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. Rthe seat belt is not twisted. Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the center of your shoulder. The shoulder section of the belt must not come into contact with your neck or be routed under your arm. Where possible, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height. Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down as possible across your lap. The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdomen. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder section of the belt. Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, pointed or fragile objects. If you have such items located on or in your clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store these in a suitable place. Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a time. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event of an accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. Robjects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Seat belts are only intended to secure and restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the "Loading guidelines" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 298). Fastening and adjusting the seat belts Please take note of the safety notes on seat belts (Y page 44) and the notes on their correct use (Y page 45). If the center rear seat belt is used, observe the information about the seat belt for the center rear seat (Y page 47). Adjust the seat (Y page 108). The seat backrest must be in an almost upright position. X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of belt outlet = and engage belt tongue ; in buckle :. The driver's and front-passenger's seat belts are automatically pulled taut as required, see “Belt adjustment” (Y page 47). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. X Occupant safety 47 The shoulder section of the belt must always run over the center of the shoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary. To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards. The belt outlet engages in various positions. X To lower: slide the belt outlet downward, pressing belt outlet release catch :. X Once the desired position has been reached, release belt outlet release catch : and ensure the belt outlet engages in place. All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to secure child restraint systems properly. Further information can be found under "Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 60). Safety X X Press release button :, hold belt tongue ; firmly and guide it back towards belt outlet =. Seat belt for the center rear seat Seat belt adjustment If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded down and back up again, the rear center seat belt may lock. The seat belt can then not be pulled out. X To release the rear center seat belt: pull the seat belt out approximately 1 in (25 mm) at the belt outlet on the backrest and then release it again. The seat belt is retracted and released. The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This function adjusts the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Releasing seat belts ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle and Rthe ignition is switched on The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain tightening force if any slack is detected between the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off using COMAND or Audio 20. Information on activating and deactivating the seatbelt adjustment function can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual or in the separate COMAND or Audio 20 operating instructions. Z 48 Occupant safety Safety Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder that all occupants must fasten their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone. Regardless of whether the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts have already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. If, after six seconds, the driver or front-passenger seat belt has not been fastened and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened or a front door is opened again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. This warning tone stops after six seconds or when the driver's seat belt is fastened. If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) once and the driver's and frontpassenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver or front passenger unfasten their seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warning is activated again. i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belts" (Y page 284). Air bags Introduction The installation point of an air bag can be recognized by the AIR BAG symbol. An air bag complements the correctly fastened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. The air bag provides additional protection in applicable accident situations. Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems function independently from one another (Y page 56). However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury caused by an air bag due to the high speed at which the air bag must be deployed. Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not sit in the correct seat position, the air bag cannot protect as intended and could even cause additional injury when deployed. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. To avoid hazardous situations, always make sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, including pregnant women Rare sitting correctly and maintain the greatest possible distance to the air bags Rfollow the following instructions Always make sure that there are no objects between the air bag and the vehicle's occupants. RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The center of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the air bag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. You may other- wise be in the deployment area of the air bags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bag. RFor this reason, always secure persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly. If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under 12 years of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable child restraint systems. RChild restraint systems should be installed on the rear seats. ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system to the frontpassenger seat when the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled (Y page 43). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 51) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 59) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent the air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that: are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar. Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deploy- ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows, rear side trim or side walls. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. G WARNING If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects to it. G WARNING Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Front air bags Rthere Driver's air bag : inflates in front of the steering wheel; front-passenger front air bag ; inflates in front of and above the glove box. Z 49 Safety Occupant safety Safety 50 Occupant safety The front air bags for the front seats offer additional protection for the head and thorax. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps inform you about the status of the frontpassenger front air bag (Y page 43). Front-passenger front air bag ; will only deploy if: (OCS) could be restricted. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied (Y page 51). The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up (Y page 52) Rthe restraint system predicts a high severity of an accident Driver's knee bag Front side impact air bags : and rear side impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest. When deployed, the side impact air bag offers additional thorax protection. However, it does not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms Driver's knee bag : inflates underneath the steering column. The driver's knee bag is always deployed along with the driver's front air bag. The driver's knee bag on the driver's seat offers additional protection for the thigh, knee and lower leg. Side impact air bags G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even prevent the deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the function of the Occupant Classification System In the event of a side impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side (front) deploys in the following situations: Rthe OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the frontpassenger seat is occupied or not. Occupant safety Window curtain air bags 51 Prerequisites To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit: the seat belt fastened correctly an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, OCS may produce a false classification, e.g. because the front passenger: Window curtain air bags : are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. When deployed, the window curtain air bag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect the chest or arms. In the event of a side impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be deployed in other accident situations (Y page 56). Occupant Classification System (OCS) Introduction The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the person in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the frontpassenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated. The system does not deactivate: Rtransfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat cushion If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the correct positioning of the child restraint system. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forwards-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function correctly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Rthe side impact air bag Rthe window curtain air bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices Z Safety Rwith Rin Occupant safety 52 Occupant Classification System operation (OCS) front air bag both before and during the journey. Safety G WARNING : PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp ; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp The indicator lamps inform you whether the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or enabled. X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The system carries out a self-diagnosis. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON : lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front air bag is deployed. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ; lights up: the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. They will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the status of the front-passenger front air bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag display message appears in the instrument cluster (Y page 263). When the frontpassenger seat is occupied, always pay attention to the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamps. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the frontpassenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible. Rthe person is seated correctly. Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front-passenger front air bag is correct. G WARNING If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit up, the front-passenger front air bag may deploy in an accident. The child could be struck by the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front air bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. You can find more information on OCS under "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 55). G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON is lit up This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. If OCS determines that: Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child of up to 12 months old, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. But in the case of a 12-month-old child, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON can light up permanently after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's stature. It is recommended that you install the restraint system on a suitable rear seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), either the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification. - if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Alternatively, a person of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat. - if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature should not use the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person of a stature corresponding to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 59). When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air bag is deactivated in this case and does not deploy during an accident. Have the system checked by qualified technicians as soon as possible. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The front-passenger seat should only be repaired at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion is damaged, have the nec- Z 53 Safety Occupant safety Safety 54 Occupant safety essary repair work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated. System self-test G DANGER If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do not light up during the system self-test, the system is malfunctioning. The frontpassenger front air bag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G DANGER If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger front air bag cannot perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the frontpassenger seat. That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the frontpassenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect OCS operation. This could result in the front-passenger air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the forwardsfacing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp display the status of the frontpassenger front air bag (Y page 52). For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 55). Occupant safety 55 Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 54). Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is BAG OFF indicator incorrect. lamp lights up and X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the perremains lit, even son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 51). though the frontX If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the passenger seat is occufront-passenger seat may not be used. pied by an adult or a X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized person of a stature corMercedes-Benz Center. responding to that of an adult. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up and/or does not stay on. The front-passenger seat is: OCS is malfunctioning. X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child seat. X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forwards-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of front-passenger seat. If necessary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat. Runoccupied X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted. Roccupied by the weight of a child up X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the to 12 months old in a seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the frontchild restraint syspassenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and tem the child restraint system being pulled too tightly. X Check the installation of the child restraint system. Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accordingly. X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat. X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/ or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recommended that you install the restraint system on a suitable rear seat. X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Z Safety Problem 56 Occupant safety Deployment of Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags Safety Important safety notes G WARNING The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. G WARNING A deployed air bag no longer offers any protection and cannot provide the intended protection in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have a deployed air bag replaced. It is important for your safety and that of your passenger to have deployed air bags replaced and to have any malfunctioning air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash. G WARNING Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices which have been triggered immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trigger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous situations. This procedure is reversible. If Emergency Tensioning Devices or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder that is released generally does not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause short-term breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory problems. To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle or open the windows as soon as it is safe to do so. Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/ index.cfm. Method of operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: Rduration Rdirection Rintensity Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit deploys the Emergency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or rear collision. An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be deployed, if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational; see "Restraint system warning lamp" (Y page 43) Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on the respective front-passenger seat The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear compartment are deployed independently of the lock status of the seat belts. If the restraint system control unit detects a more severe accident, further components of the restraint system are activated independently of each other in certain frontal collision situations: RFront air bags and driver's knee bag RWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter- mines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt The front-passenger front air bag is activated or deactivated depending on the person on the front-passenger seat. The frontpassenger front air bag can only deploy in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps(Y page 43). Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. During the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed with the maximum amount of propellant gas if a second deployment threshold is reached within a few milliseconds. The deployment threshold of the Emergency Tensioning Devices and the air bag are determined by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration which occurs at various points in the vehicle. This process is preemptive in nature. Deployment should take place in good time at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rthe distribution of forces during the collision Rthe collision angle Rthe deformation characteristics of the vehicle Rthe characteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors that can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an air bag, nor do they provide an indication of air bag deployment. The vehicle can be deformed considerably, without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of deceleration is not high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs as a result. If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact or that the vehicle is rolling over, the relevant restraint system components are activated independently of one another depending on the apparent type of accident. If the system determines a need for additional protection for the vehicle occupants, the Emergency Tensioning Devices are deployed. RSide impact air bags on the side of impact, independently of the Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of the seat belt on the driver's seat and outer seats in the second row The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side (front) deploys in the following situations: - the OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or - the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact, independently of the use of the seat belt and independently of whether the front-passenger is occupied RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and front-passenger side in certain situations when the vehicle rolls over, if the system determines that deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The different air bag systems work independently of each other. Z 57 Safety Occupant safety 58 Occupant safety Safety How the air bag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the apparent type of accident: Rfrontal collision impact Rrollover Rside PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection system) Introduction PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures to protect occupants in certain hazardous situations. Important safety notes ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. tem detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations. PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof and the side windows are closed so that only a small gap remains. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is completely closed. Rvehicles with the memory function for the front-passenger seat: the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable position. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt pre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: Rif X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly when the vehicle is stationary. The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released. Despite your vehicle being equipped with the PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of personal injuries occurring as a result of an accident cannot be eliminated. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. You will find information on the convenience function under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 47). Function Introduction PRE-SAFE® intervenes: PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rearend collision is imminent. In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes preemptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when BAS is activated. Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys- ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely. Rvehicles with the Driving Assistance package: when a driver assistance system intervenes powerfully or the radar sensor sys- PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection system PLUS) Children in the vehicle PRE-SAFE® The intervention of PLUS cannot prevent an imminent collision. The driver is not warned when PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes. PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the vehicle is backing up. PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not perform braking actions while the vehicle is in motion or when Parking Guidance is active. Function PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situations if the radar sensor system detects an imminent head-on or rear-end collision. PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rif the radar sensor system detects that a head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts are pre-tensioned. Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rear-end collision is imminent: - the brake pressure is increased if the driver applies the brakes when the vehicle is stationary. - the seat belts are pre-tensioned. The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is canceled: Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when a gear is engaged Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no longer detected Rif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention to pull away If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, the original settings are restored. Automatic measures after an accident Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact: Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated emergency lighting is activated Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked Rthe front side windows are lowered Rvehicles with a memory function: the electrically adjustable steering wheel is raised Rthe engine is switched off Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency call Rthe Children in the vehicle Important safety notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children are generally better protected there. If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 51) Z Safety Important safety notes 59 60 Children in the vehicle G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease Safety the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. 41 lbs (18 kg) or until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt can be fastened properly without a booster seat. Rshift G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 44) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 45). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over Special seat belt retractor G WARNING If the seat belt is released while driving, the child restraint system will no longer be secured properly. The special seat belt retractor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot be immediately refastened. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and secure the child restraint system properly. All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot slacken once the child seat is secured. Installing a child restraint system: Make sure you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet. X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle. X Activating the special seat belt retractor: Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is enabled. X Push the child restraint system down so that the seat belt is tight and does not loosen. X Make sure you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Press the belt buckle release button, hold the belt tongue and guide it back towards the belt outlet. The special seat belt retractor is deactivated. X Child restraint system The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Rthe G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions and the notes on use. Please ensure, that the base of the child restraint system is always resting completely on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. 61 sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always install child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Safety Removing a child restraint system/deactivating the special seat belt retractor: Children in the vehicle You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guidelines" (Y page 298). G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident as soon as possible. Have the securing systems on the child restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, before you install a child restraint system again. Securing systems for the child restraint system are: Rthe seat belt system ISOFIX (LATCH-type) securing rings Rthe Top Tether anchorages If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 51). There you will also find information on deactivating the front-passenger front air bag. Rthe G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a Z 62 Children in the vehicle All child restraint systems must meet the following standards: Safety RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2 Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system G WARNING LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. In the event of an accident, a child might not be restrained correctly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. Before every trip, make sure that the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings ! When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the middle seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could otherwise be damaged. : LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings Vehicles with rear seat armrest: adjust the rear seat armrest so that LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings : for the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system are accessible. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings :. The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings : for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are installed on the left and right rear seats. Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle's seat belt system. Install child seats according to the manufacturer's instructions. Top Tether Introduction Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this should always be used. Children in the vehicle 63 G WARNING If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always lock rear seat backrests after installing a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjust the rear seat backrests so that they are in an upright position. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds. Top Tether anchorages Top Tether anchorage points = are installed in the rear compartment behind the head restraints on the parcel shelf. Safety Important safety notes Move head restraint : upwards. Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Route Top Tether belt A under head restraint : between the two head restraint bars. X Hook Top Tether hook ? of Top Tether belt A into Top Tether anchorage =. Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not twisted. X Tension Top Tether belt A. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Move head restraint : back down again slightly if necessary (Y page 111). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt A. X X Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat General notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises Z Safety 64 Children in the vehicle that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 51). You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: Ran incorrectly categorized person in the front-passenger seat Rthe unintentional deactivation of the frontpassenger front air bag Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard Rearward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 43) is the front-passenger front air bag deactivated. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Forward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to install a forward-facing child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as possible. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the child restraint system must, as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest of the frontpassenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Child-proof locks Important safety notes G WARNING If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thus endangering other people or road users Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always activate the child-proof locks and override feature if children are traveling in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Override feature for: Rthe Rthe rear doors (Y page 65) rear side windows (Y page 65) G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. Rshift In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside. X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow :. X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ;. Override feature for the rear side windows G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Child-proof locks for the rear doors X To activate/deactivate: press button ;. If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment. Pets in the vehicle G WARNING If you leave animals unattended or unsecured in the vehicle, they could press buttons or switches, for example. As a result, they could: Ractivate You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby endangering other road users Unsecured animals could also be flung around the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudZ 65 Safety Pets in the vehicle Safety 66 Driving safety systems den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals properly during the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal transport box. Driving safety systems Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 66) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 67) RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist (Brake Assist System PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist) (Y page 67) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (distance warning function and adaptive Brake Assist) (Y page 69) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 71) REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) (Y page 73) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 74) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 74) RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 76) Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or become distracted, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths, etc. (Y page 358). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) General information ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 286) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 251). Driving safety systems Braking If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. X If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. BAS (Brake Assist System) General information BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Braking X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist General information i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be operational. With the help of a sensor system and a camera system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles: Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time Rthat cross the path of your vehicle In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected. BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. If the radar sensor system or the camera system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions are restricted or no longer available. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BAS. i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section“ (Y page 67). BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are assisted when braking. Important safety notes G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. Z Safety ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. 67 68 Driving safety systems In such cases, BAS PLUS may: Rintervene unnecessarily intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Safety Rnot G WARNING BAS PLUS does not react: Rto small people, e.g. children animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rwhen cornering As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Rvehicles quickly moving into the radar sensor system detection range Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rthere is glare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rdarkness Rif: pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle - the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects - a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. - Function To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the brake force necessary if: Ryou approach an obstacle, and PLUS has detected a risk of collision When driving at a speed under 20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake pressure will be carried out at the last possible moment. When driving at a speed above 20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the brake pressure to a value adapted to the traffic situation. BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations with vehicles in front within a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h). RBAS Driving safety systems Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle Robjects crossing your path and that are recognized in the detection range of the sensors i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes function as usual again, if: Ryou release the brake pedal. is no longer a risk of collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. Ryou activate kickdown. Rthere COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS General information COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS consists of a distance warning function with an autonomous emergency braking function and adaptive Brake Assist. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and audible collision warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you. Important safety notes In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Rnew vehicles or after a service on the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system Observe the notes in the section on breaking-in (Y page 156). Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Rthere Distance warning function Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 66). G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto Z Safety At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can react to: 69 70 Driving safety systems Safety G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning function may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely solely on the distance warning function. Rnot Function X To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate the distance warning function in the on-board computer (Y page 245). If the distance warning function is not activated, the æ symbol appears in the assistance graphics display. The distance warning function can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obsta- cles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h), the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles. If you approach an obstacle and the distance warning function detects a risk of a collision, the system will initially alert you both visually and acoustically. Autonomous braking function If the driver does not react to the distance warning signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with the autonomous braking function. The autonomous braking function: Rgives the driver more time to react to critical driving situations Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or Rreduces the effects of an accident Vehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: the autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R5 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objects R5 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary objects Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: the autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R5 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for moving objects R5 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary objects If the autonomous braking function requires a particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. Adaptive Brake Assist i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation. G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can: Rintervene unnecessarily intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Rnot G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene. If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, it calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adap- tive Brake Assist will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal. Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously. Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph (250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been detected as such at least once over the period of observation. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to stationary obstacles. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tires and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. Z 71 Safety Driving safety systems 72 Driving safety systems ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Safety tion (Y page 66). ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®. Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active, even if you deactivate ESP®. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ! If you test the parking brake using a brake dynamometer, switch the ignition off. Application of the brakes by ESP® may otherwise destroy the brake system. When towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised, observe the notes on ESP® (Y page 353). ESP® is deactivated if the warning lamp å in the instrument cluster lights up and: Rthe vehicle is moving Rthe ECO start/stop function is activated If the ÷ warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 288) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 251). Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. Characteristics of ESP® General information If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically active. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. If ESP® intervenes: Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X ECO start/stop function The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. Deactivating/activating ESP® Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). You can select between the following states of ESP®: RESP® RESP® is activated. is deactivated. G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Driving safety systems It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it is also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. Rin Crosswind Assist ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an General information Strong crosswinds can cause your vehicle to deviate from a straight course. The crosswind driving assistance function integrated into ESP® significantly reduces these effects. ESP® intervenes automatically according to the direction and intensity of the crosswinds affecting your vehicle. ESP intervenes with stabilizing braking to assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane. Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering gently. extended period with ESP® deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. Deactivating/activating ESP® You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the on-board computer. X To deactivate: (Y page 72). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To activate: (Y page 72). The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. driven wheels can spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. Rtraction control is still activated. RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes. Rthe Important safety notes Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. EBD (electronic brake force distribution) General information EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have Z Safety Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. 73 74 Driving safety systems Safety the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 286) as well as display messages (Y page 254). ADAPTIVE BRAKE ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 196) and hill start assist (Y page 160). PRE-SAFE® Brake General information i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section (Y page 66). PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available for vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be switched on and be operational. With the help of the radar sensor system and the camera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected. PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians using typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section“ (Y page 74). PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking. Important safety notes G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehicle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you brake yourself. Even after subsequent full application of the brakes a collision cannot always be avoided, particularly when approaching at too high a speed. There is a risk of an accident. Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic conditions. In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle automatically under the following conditions: Rthe driver and front-passenger have their seat belts fastened and Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h) Driving safety systems Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: Rto small people, e.g. children animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Rto As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired in the event of: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line relative to the center of your vehicle Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rthere is glare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rdarkness Rif: pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle - the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects - a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. - Function X To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 245). If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display. Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. or X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. If there is an increased risk of collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRESAFE®) are activated. If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front remains and you do not brake, take evasive Z Safety At a speed of up to approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect: 75 Safety 76 Protection against theft action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking, up to the point of full brake application. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an imminent accident. You can prevent the intervention of the PRESAFE® Brake at any time by: Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further. kickdown. Rreleasing the brake pedal. The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended automatically if: Ractivating Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle. is no longer a risk of collision. Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle. Rthere STEER CONTROL General information STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering assistance is provided in particular if: Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake. Rthe vehicle starts to skid. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). No steering support is provided from STEER CONTROL, if: RESP® is malfunctioning. lighting is faulty. If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electrical power steering. Rthe Protection against theft Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO startfunction or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. i The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine. In the event that the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Protection against theft A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: Ra door vehicle with the mechanical key Rthe trunk lid Rthe hood X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey: press the % or & button on the SmartKey. The alarm is switched off. or X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/ Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. Rthe X i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system automatically sends a message to the Customer Assistance Center. This is done either by text message or data connection. The emergency call system sends the message or data provided that: Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service. Rthe mbrace service has been activated properly. Rthe necessary mobile phone network is available. To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example. Z Safety To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately 15 seconds. X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X 77 78 79 Useful information .............................. 80 SmartKey ............................................. 80 Doors .................................................... 87 Trunk .................................................... 90 Side windows ...................................... 97 Opening and closing Sliding sunroof .................................. 101 80 SmartKey Useful information Opening and closing i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). SmartKey Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations. Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do not keep the SmartKey on the parcel shelf or in the trunk. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be detected, e.g. when starting the engine using the Start/Stop button. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rwhen Rrelease Rwhilst the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. starting the engine driving Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing SmartKey SmartKey functions 81 is in close proximity to the vehicle: press the F button on the SmartKey. You can release the button as soon as the trunk lid starts to close. General notes : & Locks the vehicle ; F Opens/closes the trunk lid = % Unlocks the vehicle X To unlock centrally: press button =. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again. against theft is reactivated. Rprotection X To lock centrally: press button :. The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors trunk lid Rthe fuel filler flap The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking. You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated via COMAND or Audio 20 (see the separate operating instructions). When the locator lighting is activated via COMAND or Audio 20, it lights up when it is dark after the vehicle is unlocked with the remote control (see the separate operating instructions). X To open the trunk lid automatically from outside the vehicle: press and hold button ; until the trunk lid opens. X To open the trunk lid automatically from outside the vehicle: if the SmartKey Rthe Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a SmartKey in the vehicle. Locking/unlocking centrally You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the SmartKey. The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine driving Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing Rwhilst Z Opening and closing KEYLESS-GO SmartKey 82 KEYLESS-GO start function Opening and closing Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a SmartKey in the vehicle. Changing the settings of the locking system To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface : or ;. Make sure that you do not touch the inner surface of the door handle. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period. Further information on the convenience closing feature (Y page 99). X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle on the trunk lid. X Deactivating If you do not intend to use the vehicle for a longer period of time, you can deactivate KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby conserving battery power. For the purposes of activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be nearby. X To deactivate: press the & button on the SmartKey twice in rapid succession. The battery check lamp of the SmartKey lights up twice briefly and KEYLESS-GO is deactivated. X To activate: press any button on the SmartKey or insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features are available again. You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. X To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 84). If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle The SmartKey now functions as follows: To unlock the driver's door: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. X The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the frontpassenger door or the rear door. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles. X X To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six sec- SmartKey Mechanical key General notes If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 76). If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Removing the mechanical key X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key ; from the SmartKey. For further information about: Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 88) the trunk (Y page 96) Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 89) SmartKey battery Important safety notes G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries. The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/ index.cfm. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Runlocking Inserting the mechanical key X Push mechanical key ; completely into the SmartKey until it engages and release catch : is back in its basic position. Z Opening and closing onds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 84). 83 SmartKey 84 Opening and closing Checking the battery Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly. X Change the battery (Y page 84). If the key battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: opens. Do not hold battery compartment cover : closed while doing so. X Remove battery compartment cover :. X Rlocks or Runlocks X the vehicle i You can obtain a battery from any qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 83). X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contaminants. X Press mechanical key ; into the opening in the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing first and then press to close it. Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey. X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle. X SmartKey 85 Problems with the SmartKey Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 88) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using the mechanical key. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Unlock (Y page 88) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X The SmartKey is faulty. X Unlock (Y page 88) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You can no longer lock KEYLESS-GO was deactivated. or unlock the vehicle X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 81). using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 84) and replace it if necessary (Y page 84). If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 88) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using the mechanical key. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Unlock (Y page 88) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning. Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: X Unlock (Y page 88) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Opening and closing You can no longer lock The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. or unlock the vehicle X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 84) and replace it if necusing the SmartKey. essary (Y page 84). Opening and closing 86 SmartKey Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine cannot be started using the SmartKey. X The on-board voltage is too low. Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 347). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 349). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The engine cannot be The vehicle is locked. started using the Start/ X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again. Stop button. The SmartKey is in the vehi- The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. cle. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 84) and replace it if necessary (Y page 84). If this does not work: X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X You have lost a SmartKey. Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. You have lost the mechanical key. X X X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Doors 87 Doors Important safety notes Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. X To unlock and open a front door: pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and opens. X To unlock a rear door: pull door handle ;. Locking knob : pops up and the door unlocks. X To open a rear door: pull door handle ; again. The door opens. Rrelease Rshifting You should preferably place luggage or loads in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 298). Unlocking and opening doors from the inside Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock and unlock the vehicle from the inside. The switches are on the driver’s door. You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 65). If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 76). X X To unlock: press button :. To lock: press button ;. If the front-passenger door is closed, the vehicle locks. Z Opening and closing G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Doors Opening and closing 88 Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. The doors can be opened from the inside. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the childproof locks (Y page 65). If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 76). If a locked door is opened from the inside, the previous unlock status of the vehicle will be taken into consideration if: Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking button for the central locking, or Rif the vehicle was locked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's door had been previously unlocked, only the door which has been opened from the inside is unlocked. If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. You could therefore be locked out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. Rthe i You can also activate and deactivate the automatic locking function via COMAND or Audio 20 (see the separate operating instructions). Unlocking the driver's door (mechanical key) If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 83). Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Automatic locking feature To deactivate: press and hold button : for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds. X Insert the tip of the mechanical key into the slit on the cover of the driver's door lock and turn it until the cover is released. X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. The locking knob pops up and the door unlocks. X Doors Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey (Y page 83). X Carefully press the protective cap onto the lock cylinder until it engages and is seated firmly. Do not pull the door handle when doing so. X All vehicles: If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 76). Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) Insert the mechanical key into opening : in the protective cap. X Pull and hold the door handle. X Pull the protective cap on the mechanical key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases. X Release the door handle. X If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. X Open the driver's door. X Close the front-passenger door, the rear doors and the trunk lid. X Press the locking button (Y page 87). X Check whether the locking knobs on the front-passenger door and the rear doors are still visible. Press down the locking knobs by hand, if necessary. X Close the driver's door. X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 83). Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: X Insert the tip of the mechanical key into the slit on the cover of the driver's door lock and turn it until the cover is released. Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. The locking knob pops up and the door unlocks. X Z Opening and closing Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. X Hold the cover over the lock of the driver's door with the thicker end towards the front of the vehicle and press to secure. Then make sure that the slit of the cover is horizontal. X 89 Trunk 90 Pull the protective cap on the mechanical key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases. X Release the door handle. Opening and closing X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. The locking knob drops down and the driver's door is locked. X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid are locked. X Hold the cover over the lock of the driver's door with the thicker end towards the front of the vehicle and press to secure. Then make sure that the slit of the cover is horizontal. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go. X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. The locking knob drops down and the driver's door is locked. X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey (Y page 83). X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid are locked. X Carefully press the protective cap onto the lock cylinder until it engages and is seated firmly. Do not pull the door handle when doing so. X All vehicles: If you lock the vehicle as described above, the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed. Trunk Insert the mechanical key into opening : in the protective cap. X Pull and hold the door handle. X Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, Trunk G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 403). i You can limit the opening angle of the trunk lid in COMAND or Audio 20 (see the separate operating instructions). Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You could otherwise lock yourself out. You should preferably place luggage or loads in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 298). with reversing feature is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when opening and closing the trunk lid. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 1/3 in(8 mm) of the closing movement This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped: Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or Rpress the remote operating switch on the driver's door, or Rpress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid, or Rpull on the trunk lid handle Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. Opening and closing manually Opening Obstacle recognition with trunk lid reversing feature Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing feature: the trunk lid is equipped with automatic obstacle detection with reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the trunk lid when automatically opening, this procedure is stopped. If a solid object blocks or restricts the trunk lid when automatically closing, the trunk lid opens again automatically. The automatic obstacle recognition Z Opening and closing especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. 91 Trunk 92 X Press the F button on the SmartKey. or X Pull handle :. The trunk lid opens. Opening and closing Closing RPress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. RPull the trunk lid handle. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. G WARNING Pull the trunk lid down using recess : and push it closed. X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the & button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESSGO (Y page 81). X Opening/closing automatically from outside Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: RPress the F button on the key. the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Rpress Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 403). Opening You can open the trunk lid automatically using the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk lid. X Press and hold the F button on the SmartKey until the trunk lid opens. or X If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lid handle and let it go again immediately. Trunk Closing 93 ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. HANDS-FREE ACCESS Important safety notes X Press closing button : on the trunk lid. Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO: when the driver's door is closed you can simultaneously close the trunk lid and lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. X Press locking button ; in the trunk lid. If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey outside the vehicle, the trunk lid closes and the vehicle is locked. If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the trunk, the trunk lid opens again after it is closed. If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey outside the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed. Opening automatically from outside Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. G WARNING The vehicle's exhaust system may be very hot. You could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system if you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Always ensure that you only make the kicking movement within the detection range of sensors. ! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk: Rusing a car wash a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Rusing General notes With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you can open or close the trunk lid or stop the procedure without using your hands. This is useful if you have your hands full. To do this, make a kicking movement under the bumper with your foot. Observe the following points: RCarry your KEYLESS-GO key about your person. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. RWhen making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground and that there is sufficient clearance to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise lose your balance e.g. on ice. Z Opening and closing The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the printed Operator's Manual. 94 Trunk Opening and closing Operation RAlways ensure that you only make the kick- ing movement within the detection range of sensors :. RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the rear area while doing so. RDo not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. Otherwise, the sensors may not function correctly. RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function when the engine is started. RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDSFREE ACCESS could be triggered. The trunk lid could thus be opened or closed unintentionally, for example, if you: - set something down or lift something up behind the vehicle. - polish the rear of the vehicle. Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your person in these situations or in situations similar to these. This will prevent the unintentional opening/closing of the trunk. RDirt caused by road salt around sensors : may restrict functionality. RUsing the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a prosthetic leg may restrict functionality. X To open/close: kick into sensor detection range : under the bumper with your foot. You will hear a warning tone while the trunk lid is opening or closing. X If the trunk lid does not open after several attempts: wait at least ten seconds then move your leg under the bumper once again. If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long, the trunk lid does not open or close. Repeat the leg movement more quickly if this occurs. To stop the opening or closing procedure: Rmove your foot in sensor detection range : under the bumper, or Rpull the handle on the outside of the trunk lid or Rpress the closing button in the trunk lid or Rpress the F button on the SmartKey If the trunk lid closing procedure has been stopped: Rmove your foot under the bumper again and the trunk lid will open. If the trunk lid opening procedure has been stopped: Rmove your foot under the bumper again and the trunk lid will close. Trunk Opening/closing automatically from inside 95 Opening and closing G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: RPress the F button on the key. the remote operating switch on the driver's door. RPress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. RPull the trunk lid handle. Rpress Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 403). You can open and close the trunk lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. X To open: pull remote operating switch for trunk lid : until the trunk lid opens. X To close: press remote operating switch for trunk lid : until the trunk lid is completely closed. Opening automatically from inside Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the printed Operator's Manual. Z Opening and closing Important safety notes Trunk 96 Opening Deactivating the function to lock the trunk separately: X Opening and closing X Open the glove box. Push the switch to position ;. If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk will also be unlocked. Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key) ! The trunk lid swings upwards when You can open the trunk lid from the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. X Pull remote operating switch for trunk lid : until the trunk lid opens. Locking the trunk separately You can lock the trunk separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains locked and cannot be opened. Activating the function to lock the trunk separately: Close the trunk lid. Open the glove box. X Push the switch to position :. If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk remains locked. i You can also lock the glove box (Y page 299). X X opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the SmartKey, KEYLESS-GO or HANDS-FREE ACCESS, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 76). X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 83). X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock as far as it will go. Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go from position 1 to position 2. The trunk is unlocked. X Turn the mechanical key back to position 1 and remove it. X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey (Y page 83). X When you lock the vehicle (Y page 89), the trunk is also locked. Trunk emergency release You can unlock the trunk lid from the inside with the emergency release button. G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. G WARNING X Press emergency release button : briefly. The trunk lid unlocks and opens. The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunk lid emergency release when the vehicle is stationary or while driving. The trunk lid emergency release does not unlock the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or discharged. Trunk lid emergency release light: Remergency release button : flashes for 30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened Remergency release button : flashes for 60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed Side windows Important safety notes G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again. If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Side window reversing feature The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window from traveling upwards during automatic operation, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing a side window. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rwhile resetting This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. Z 97 Opening and closing Side windows Side windows 98 Opening and closing Opening and closing the side windows The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window. The switches on the driver's door take precedence. SmartKey. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door. When the override feature for the side windows is activated (Y page 65), the side windows cannot be operated from the rear. i Information on opening and closing the roller sunblinds on the rear side windows (Y page 308). Convenience opening General notes : ; = ? Front left Front right Rear right Rear left Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To open manually: press and hold the corresponding switch. X To open fully: press the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To close manually: pull the corresponding switch and hold it. X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To interrupt automatic operation: press/pull the corresponding switch again. X If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance and release, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/ pulling the switch again. You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine or remove the Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESSGO start function: you can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. If the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehicle, the convenience opening function is available. To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Runlock the vehicle the side windows Ropen the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's seat Ropen Convenience opening Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are in the desired position. If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first. X Press and hold the % button again until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is in the desired position. X To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button. X Side windows X Important safety notes To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button. G WARNING Using KEYLESS-GO When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The gap between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESSGO start function: if the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehicle, the convenience closing function is available. When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously: Rclose the side windows the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller sunblinds. Notes on the automatic reversing feature for: Rclose Rthe side window (Y page 97) sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel (Y page 102) Rthe Using the SmartKey Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed. X X Vehicles with panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: press and hold the & button until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close. Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed. Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed. X Vehicles with panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close. X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. X Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. Z Opening and closing Convenience closing feature 99 Side windows 100 Close all the doors. Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 98). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X Opening and closing X If the side window opens again slightly: Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 98). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the respective side window remains closed after the button is released, then it has been set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. X Sliding sunroof 101 Problems with the side windows If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. Remove the objects. X Close the side window. X A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again be closed and you can- slightly: not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. Sliding sunroof If somebody becomes trapped: Important safety notes Rrelease Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel. In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof. G WARNING While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, body parts in close proximity could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the opening and closing procedures. the switch immediately, or automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. Rduring G WARNING If children operate the sliding sunroof they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Z Opening and closing G WARNING 102 Sliding sunroof ! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of Opening and closing snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. ! The weather can change abruptly. It could start to rain or snow. Make sure that the sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if water enters the vehicle interior. Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. Only for vehicles with panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: G WARNING At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers slightly at the rear. This could trap you or other persons. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the vehicle is in motion. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The sliding sunroof lifts during opening. feature is only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing the sliding roof. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing movement Rduring resetting Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The closing process is stopped. Rduring Operating the sliding sunroof Opening and closing Sliding sunroof reversing feature Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel. In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof. The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens again automatically. The automatic reversing Overhead control panel : To raise ; To open = To close/lower Sliding sunroof If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing or pulling again. When opening and raising the roof, automatic operation is only available if the sliding sunroof is in the closed position. The sun protection cover automatically opens along with the sliding sunroof. You can open or close the sun protection cover manually when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed. You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. Resetting ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed fully after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move smoothly. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear (Y page 102). X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another second. X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully opened and closed again (Y page 102). X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. Operating the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Opening and closing Opening and closing Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. X 103 Overhead control panel : To raise ; To open = To close/lower The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can only be operated when the roller sunblind is open. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing or pulling again. If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is raised at the rear, it automatically lowers slightly at higher speeds. The noise level in the vehicle interior is reduced as a result. At low speeds it raises again automatically. You can continue to operate the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel after you switch off the engine or remove the SmartKey. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door. When a roof carrier is mounted the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be opened. The panorama roof with power tilt/ Z 104 Sliding sunroof Opening and closing sliding panel can still be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel makes contact with a roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof will lower slightly but remain raised at the rear. Rain-closing feature The raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers at the rear when driving if it starts to rain. The sliding sunroof is lowered depending on: Rthe road speed and intensity of the rain. You can manually cancel the automatic closing procedure. Press or pull the 3 switch in any direction. To raise the sliding sunroof again, press the 3 switch in direction :. The "Rain-closing feature when driving" function is deactivated, until you: Rthe Rpress or pull the 3 switch in any direction or Rturn the SmartKey to another position in the ignition lock (Y page 157). Operating the roller sunblinds for the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Important safety notes G WARNING When opening or closing the roller sunblind, parts of the body could be trapped between the roller sunblind and the frame or sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. When opening or closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction Rduring The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior from sunlight. The front roller sunblind can only be opened and closed when the sliding sunroof is closed. Roller sunblind reversing feature The roller sunblinds are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing the roller sunblinds. G WARNING The reversing feature especially does not react to soft, light and thin objects such as small fingers. This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The closing process is stopped. Rduring Sliding sunroof Overhead control panel : To open ; To open = To close You can only close the roller sunblinds when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Press the 3 switch in direction :. Both roller sunblinds open, then the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is raised. X Pull the 3 switch in direction ;. The sunblinds open X Pull the 3 switch in direction =. The roller sunblinds close when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing or pulling again. Resetting the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the front roller sunblind Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the front roller sunblind if the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller sunblinds does not move smoothly. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow : until the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel is fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Pull the 3 switch in the direction of arrow : repeatedly until the front roller sunblind is closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Make sure that the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel (Y page 103) and the front roller sunblind (Y page 105) can be fully opened again. X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. Z Opening and closing Opening and closing the roller sunblinds 105 106 Sliding sunroof Problems with the sliding sunroof Opening and closing G WARNING If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The closing process is stopped. Rduring ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The sliding sunroof or If the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panorama roof with panel is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: power tilt/sliding panel X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to cannot be closed and the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof or panorama roof you cannot see the with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. cause. The sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed with more force. If the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. The sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. 107 Useful information ............................ 108 Correct driver's seat position .......... 108 Seats .................................................. 109 Steering wheel .................................. 115 Mirrors ............................................... 117 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Memory function .............................. 120 108 Correct driver's seat position Useful information Seats, steering wheel and mirrors i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). Correct driver's seat position G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 109). X Make sure that seat = is adjusted properly. Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 110) When adjusting the seat, make sure that: X Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible are sitting in a normal upright position Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported Ryou can depress the pedals properly. Ryour legs are not fully extended X Check whether the head restraint is adjusted properly. When doing so, make sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint. X Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (Y page 115). X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted properly. Adjust the steering wheel manually (Y page 115) Adjust the steering wheel electrically (Y page 116) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 44). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 46). Seats Rfit snugly across your body Rbe routed across the middle of your shoulder Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a way that you have a good view of road and traffic conditions (Y page 118). X Vehicles with memory function: you can store the seat, steering wheel, exterior mirror and head-up display settings with the memory function (Y page 121). Seats Important safety notes G WARNING Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The seats can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock. G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" (Y page 48) and "Children in the Vehicle" (Y page 59). G WARNING If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the engine. G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. G WARNING If head restraints are not installed and adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The seat belt should: 109 110 Seats poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. Adjusting the seats manually and electrically Adjusting the seats electrically ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat Seats, steering wheel and mirrors heating, observe the following information: Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see "Interior care". Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. : ; = ? A B Electrically adjustable seats with memory function Head restraint height Backrest angle Seat height Seat cushion length Seat cushion angle Seat fore-and-aft adjustment i Further related subjects: RYou can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 121). PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the frontpassenger seat will be moved to a better position if it was previously in an unfavorable position (Y page 58). RIf i The rear-compartment head restraints can be removed (Y page 112). Vehicles without the through-loading feature: the head restraints cannot be removed from the rear compartment seats. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. i Further related subjects: RRear bench seat through-loading feature (Y page 301) Electrically adjustable seats without memory function : Backrest angle Seats ; = ? A Seat height Seat cushion length Seat cushion angle Seat fore-and-aft adjustment 111 Adjusting the head restraint height manually Adjusting the head restraints G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position. X Adjusting the head restraint fore-andaft position manually If head restraints are not installed and adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. General notes Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 109). Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height and angle of the head restraints to the correct position. With this function you can adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of the seat occupant's head. X To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages in the desired position. X To move backwards: press and hold release button :. X Push the head restraint back. X Release the release button once the head restraint is in the desired position. X Ensure that the head restraint has engaged properly. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Important safety notes Seats 112 Adjusting the height of the head restraints electrically X To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for head restraint adjustment (Y page 110) up or down in the direction of the arrow. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the rear seat head restraint height Release the rear seat backrest and fold it slightly forwards (Y page 302). X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop. X Press release catch : and pull the head restraint out of the guides. X To re-install: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position. X Fold back the rear seat backrest until it engages. X Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support Once the head restraint is fully lowered, press release catch :. X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X X To lower: press release catch : and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position. Installing and removing rear head restraints : ; = ? To raise the backrest contour To soften the backrest contour To lower the backrest contour To harden the backrest contour You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back. Switching the seat heating on/off Switching on/off G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high tempera- Seats 113 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors tures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. X i If drive program E (Y page 168) is selected, the power of the seat heating is reduced. Z 114 Seats Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Problems with the seat heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The seat heating has switched off prematurely or cannot be switched on. The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating can be switched back on manually. Switching the seat ventilation on/off Activating/deactivating The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off. i You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature (Y page 98). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level. i When the vehicle is stationary, the fan speed can be reduced automatically. This reduces the noises of the seat ventilation. Steering wheel 115 Problems with the seat ventilation Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Steering wheel Important safety notes Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The seat ventilation has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical conswitched off premasumers are switched on. turely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation can be switched back on. Adjusting the steering wheel manually G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The electrically adjustable steering wheel can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. : Release lever ; To adjust the steering wheel height = To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) Push release lever : down completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up completely. The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction. X Z 116 Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel electrically G WARNING If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, they can become trapped, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING : To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) ; To adjust the steering wheel height i Further related subjects: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 116) RStoring settings (Y page 121) ROperating the on-board computer (Y page 231). EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Important safety notes G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if there is a risk of entrapment by the steering wheel. The adjustment process is stopped. Press one of the memory function position buttons. The adjustment process is stopped. This function is only available on vehicles with memory function. If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off. The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature using Audio 20/ COMAND; see the separate Audio 20/ COMAND operating instructions. Position of the steering wheel and the driver's seat when the EASY-ENTRY/ EXIT feature is active The steering wheel tilts upwards and the driver's seat moves backwards if you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Rwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door; KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1 the SmartKey: open the driver's door; the SmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 157) Ropen the driver's door when the ignition is switched off Rwith i The steering wheel only tilts upwards if the driving position is stored after the seat or steering wheel has been adjusted (Y page 121). Mirrors The most recent driving position of the steering wheel is stored if: Rthe ignition is switched off. Rthe setting is stored with the memory function (Y page 121). 117 Mirrors Rear-view mirror i The steering wheel only moves upwards if Position of the steering wheel for driving The steering wheel is moved to the last selected position when: Rthe driver's door is closed and you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock Ryou close the driver's door when the ignition is switched on Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO i The steering wheel only returns to the last set position if the driving position is stored after the seat or steering wheel has been adjusted (Y page 121). The most recent driving position of the steering wheel is stored if: Rthe ignition is switched off. Rthe setting is stored with the memory func- tion (Y page 121). Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened or the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in Audio 20/COMAND; see the separate Audio 20/COMAND operating instructions. X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : forwards or back. Exterior mirrors Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear. This means that you could misjudge the distance from road users traveling behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident. For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors it has not already reached the upper steering limiter. Mirrors 118 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the exterior mirrors Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Press button ; for the right-hand exterior mirror or button = for the left-hand exterior mirror. The indicator lamp lights up in the button that has been pressed. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button : as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press adjustment button : up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically X The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. After the engine has been started, the exterior mirrors are automatically heated if the rear window defroster is switched on and the outside temperature is low. Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Briefly press button :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate. X i If you are driving faster than 30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors. Setting the exterior mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the Automatic Mirror Folding function in the on-board computer. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Briefly press button :. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically If the Automatic Mirror Folding function is activated in COMAND or Audio 20 (see the separate COMAND or Audio 20 operating instructions): Mirrors soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out automatically again as soon as you unlock the vehicle. i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in manually, they do not fold out. Exterior mirror pushed out of position If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold button : until you hear a click and then the mirror engage in position (Y page 118). The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 118). X RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with electrolyte. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into antiglare mode if the following conditions are met simultaneously: Rthe ignition is switched on light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Rincident Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Using reverse gear Automatic anti-glare mirrors G WARNING Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the electrolyte, observe the following: RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin immediately with water. RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of your eyes thoroughly with clean water. RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. : Memory button M ; Adjustment button = Button for the front-passenger side exte- rior mirror ? Button for the driver's side exterior mirror You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as 119 Memory function 120 Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Press button = for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. X Use adjustment button ; to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Using the memory button You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M :. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Press button = for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Use adjustment button ; to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. X Press memory button M : and one of the arrows on adjustment button ; within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. X Calling up a stored parking position setting Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side using button =. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: X Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear Rif you press button ? for the exterior mirror on the driver's side Memory function Important safety notes G WARNING If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. G WARNING When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped. Memory function Storing settings With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Calling up a stored setting Press and hold the corresponding storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until: RSeat RSteering wheel RExterior mirrors RHead-up display are in the stored position. i The steering wheel and seat adjustment procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position button. The adjustment of the mirror is still carried out. X Rposition of the seat, backrest and head restraint Rseat heating: cushion surfaces Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides Rposition of the head-up display Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 110). On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 116) and the exterior mirrors (Y page 118). X Press memory button M and one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. X X Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G WARNING Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. 121 122 123 Useful information ............................ 124 Exterior lighting ................................ 124 Interior lighting ................................. 129 Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LED headlamps) ........................................ 130 Changing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) .............................. 130 Lights and windshield wipers Windshield wipers ............................ 133 124 Exterior lighting Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. Lights and windshield wipers i Read the information on qualified special- Setting the exterior lighting Setting options Exterior lighting can be set using: Rthe light switch combination switch (Y page 126) Rthe on-board computer (Y page 247) Rthe Light switch Operation ist workshops (Y page 26). Exterior lighting General notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obligations. Driving abroad Symmetrical low-beam headlamps Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low beam in countries in which traffic drives on the opposite side of the road from the country where the vehicle is registered. This prevents glare to oncoming traffic. When using symmetrical lights, the edge of the road is not lit as widely and as far ahead as normal. Have the headlamps converted at a qualified specialist workshop as close to the border as possible before driving in these countries. Asymmetrical low beam Have the headlamps converted back to asymmetrical low-beam headlamps at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible after crossing the border again. 1 W Left-hand standing lamps 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, control- led by the light sensor 5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps B R Rear fog lamp If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to Ã. The exterior lighting (except the parking/ standing lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in position 0 Automatic headlamp mode G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the lowbeam headlamps may not be switched on Exterior lighting The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. Only for Canada: The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. The daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated. When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary: if you move the selector lever from a drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after three minutes. When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the light switch to T, the daytime running lamps and parking lamps switch on. If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. USA only: The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the daytime running lamps function must be switched on using the on-board computer (Y page 247). If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to T or L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. à is the favored light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray): RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. RWith the engine running: if you have activated the "daytime running lamps" function via the on-board computer, the daytime running lamps or the parking lamps and the low-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. X To switch on automatic headlamp mode: turn the light switch to Ã. Low-beam headlamps Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps switch on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to the L position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog. X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L. The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick fog. Please take note of the countryspecific regulations for the use of rear fog lamps. X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Z Lights and windshield wipers automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. 125 Exterior lighting 126 Parking lamps ! If the battery has been excessively discharged, the parking lamps or standing lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid the continuous use of the T parking lamps for several hours. If possible, switch on the X right or the W left standing lamp. To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. To switch on: turn the light switch to T. The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. To switch on the high-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. In the à position, the high-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the high-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Lights and windshield wipers X Standing lamps Switching on the standing lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the standing lamps: the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in position 0. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle). Combination switch Turn signal X High-beam headlamps X If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, it controls activation and deactivation of the highbeam headlamps (Y page 127). High-beam flasher To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start the engine. X Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. X : ; = ? High-beam headlamps Turn signal, right High-beam flasher Turn signal, left Exterior lighting Hazard warning lamps 127 The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. X The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on if: you are driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. Adaptive Highbeam Assist General notes Ran air bag is deployed or vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a standstill The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake application. The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. Rthe Cornering light function You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and high beam automatically. The system recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or traveling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from high beam to low beam. Z Lights and windshield wipers Rif 128 Exterior lighting The system automatically adapts the lowbeam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam headlamps. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. Important safety notes Lights and windshield wipers G WARNING Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users that have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this or similar situations, the automatic highbeam headlamps will not be deactivated or activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time. Rwho Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up if it is dark and the light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above 25 km/h: If you are driving at speeds above approximately 16 mph (25 km/h): The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road users have been detected: The high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users have been detected or the roads are adequately lit: The high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit. X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Rdirt Headlamps fogged up on the inside Certain climatic and physical conditions may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp. Interior lighting Overview of interior lighting Front overhead control panel Interior lighting control General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The color, brightness and display lamp for the ambient lighting may be set using COMAND or Audio 20 (see the separate operating instructions). Automatic interior lighting control : p To switch the left-hand front reading X lamp on/off ; | To switch the automatic interior lighting control on/off = c To switch the front interior lighting on/off ? u To switch the rear interior lighting on/off A p To switch the right-hand front reading lamp on/off Control panel in the grab handle (rear compartment) To activate/deactivate: press the | button. When the automatic interior lighting control is activated, the button is flush with the overhead control panel. The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle Ropen a door Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock The interior light is activated for a short while when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted using COMAND or Audio 20 (see the separate Operator's Manual). Manual interior lighting control To switch the front interior lighting on/ off: press the c button. X To switch the interior lighting on/off: press the u button. X To switch the reading lamps on/off: press the p button. X : Reading lamp ; p Switches the reading lamp on/off Z Lights and windshield wipers Interior lighting 129 Changing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) 130 Crash-responsive emergency lighting The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident. X To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard warning lamp button. or Lights and windshield wipers X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey. Replacing bulbs (vehicles with LED headlamps) The front and rear light clusters of your vehicle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Changing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) Important safety notes G WARNING Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot when operating. If you change a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before changing a bulb. Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if its glass tube has been scratched. The bulb may explode if: Ryou Rit touch it is hot Ryou drop it scratch it Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps designed for that purpose. Only install spare bulbs of the same type and the specified voltage. Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth. Protect bulbs from moisture during operation. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 130). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself changed at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance changing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Ryou Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types You can change the following bulbs. The bulb type can be found in the legend. Changing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) 131 You must remove the cover of the front wheel housing before you can change the front turn signal lamp. To remove: switch off the lights. Turn the front wheels inwards. X Turn rotary knob : 180° outwards until it stops using a suitable object. Cover ; is released. X Fold cover ; upwards. X To install: insert cover ; into the left, right and two lower catches. X Turn rotary knob : 180° inwards until it stops using a suitable object. Cover ; is locked. X Vehicles with halogen headlamps : Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W ; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W = Turn signal lamp: PWY 24 W Low-beam headlamps Tail lamp (halogen headlamps) : Turn signal: P 21 W ; Backup lamp: W 16 W Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X X Changing the front bulbs Removing and installing the cover in the front wheel housing Z Lights and windshield wipers X Changing bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) 132 High-beam headlamps Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing (Y page 131). X X Lights and windshield wipers Changing the rear bulbs Switch off the lights. X Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Turn signal Opening and closing the side trim panels Example: right-hand side trim panel You must open the side trim panel in the trunk before you can change the bulbs in the tail lamps. To open: release right or left side trim panel : at the top and fold it down in the direction of the arrow. X To close: insert side panel :. X Tail lamps Switch off the lights. X Open the trunk. X Open the side trim panel (Y page 132). X Remove the cover in the front wheel housing (Y page 131). X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise, unlock it and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Windshield wipers 133 damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windshield is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the windshield wipers. X X Pull out the plug. Turn fender nut : 90° counter-clockwise and remove the bulb holder. the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this. Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash. ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windshield becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield. For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather. Turn signal lamp ;: lightly press the bulb into the bulb holder, turn it counter-clockwise and remove it from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and turn it clockwise. X Backup lamp =: remove the bulb from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. X Re-install bulb holder. X Turn fender nut : 90° clockwise. X Insert the connector. X Close the side trim panel (Y page 132). X 1 $ Windshield wiper off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity) 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor Windshield wipers Switching the windshield wipers on/off ! Do not operate the windshield wipers set to high sensitivity) 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe/î To wipe the windshield using washer fluid when the windshield is dry, as this could Z Lights and windshield wipers ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on Windshield wipers 134 X Lights and windshield wipers X Switch on the ignition. Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is automatically set according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windshield wipers to wipe more frequently. If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions. Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. Changing the windshield wiper blades Adjusting the wiper blades so that they are vertical On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Set the windshield wipers to position °. X When the wiper arms have reached a vertical position, turn the SmartKey to position 0 and remove it from the ignition lock. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield. X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Switch off the engine. Remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Set the windshield wipers to position °. X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windshield wiper starts. X When the wiper arms have reached a vertical position, press the Start/Stop button. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield. X X Removing the wiper blades ! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield. Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield. Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. ! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper. Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn wiper blade in direction of arrow : away from the wiper arm as far as it will go. X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow = until it engages in the removal position with a noticeable click. X Windshield wipers 135 Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. X Remove the protective film of the service indicator on the tip of the wiper blade. X i If the color of the service indicator changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced. The duration of the color change varies depending on the terms of use. Remove the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ? away from the wiper arm. Lights and windshield wipers X Installing the wiper blades X Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow :. Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow = until it engages in the locking position with a noticeable click. X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly. X Z 136 Windshield wipers Lights and windshield wipers Problems with the windshield wipers Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windshield wipers are jammed. Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on. The windshield wipers fail completely. The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The windshield washer fluid from the spray nozzles no longer hits the center of the windshield. The spray nozzles are misaligned. X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop. X 137 Useful information ............................ 138 Overview of climate control systems ................................................... 138 Operating the climate control systems ................................................... 142 Climate control Setting the air vents ......................... 152 138 Overview of climate control systems Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified special- Climate control ist workshops (Y page 26). Overview of climate control systems Important safety notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up. To prevent the windows from fogging up: Rswitch Rswitch briefly off climate control only briefly on air-recirculation mode only Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required Climate control regulates the temperature and air humidity in the vehicle interior. The interior filter cleans the air, thus improving the interior climate. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. Optimum climate control is only achieved with the side windows and roof closed. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 149). i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 98). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter filters out most par- ticles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet. i It is possible that the blower may be activated automatically 60 minutes after the SmartKey has been removed depending on various factors, e.g. the outside temperature. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the climate control system. Overview of climate control systems 139 : To set the temperature, left (Y page 145) ; To set the air distribution (Y page 146) = To set the airflow (Y page 146) To switch off climate control (Y page 142) ? To set climate control to automatic (Y page 144) A To defrost the windshield (Y page 147) B To call up the Audio 20/COMAND climate control menu; see the separate operating C D E F G instructions To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 148) To activate/deactivate synchronization (Y page 147) To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 149) To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 143) To set the temperature, right (Y page 145) Optimum use of dual-zone climate control Dual-zone automatic climate control The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of dual-zone climate control. RActivate climate control using the à rocker switch. The indicator lamp above the à rocker switch lights up. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is not activated automatically in automatic mode. If necessary, activate this function (Y page 143). RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. Climate control Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control 140 Overview of climate control systems AGILITY SELECT switch You can choose between various drive programs with the AGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 167). If you have selected the drive program E, the climate control switches to Eco mode. In Eco mode: Rthe cooling output is reduced when cooling Climate control Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is deactivated and heat output is reduced as a result Rthe rear window defroster running time is reduced If you have selected the drive program C, S or S+ the climate control switches to Comfort mode. The current climate control settings are maintained in Comfort mode. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 162). Overview of climate control systems 141 Canada only Front control panel : To set the temperature, left (Y page 145) ; To set the air distribution, left (Y page 146) = To set the airflow (Y page 146) To switch off climate control (Y page 142) ? To set climate control to automatic (Y page 144) A To defrost the windshield (Y page 147) B To call up the Audio 20/COMAND climate control menu; see the separate operating C D E F G H I J instructions To activate/deactivate the residual heat function (Y page 149) To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 148) To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 143) To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode manually (Y page 149) To set the air distribution, right (Y page 146) To set the temperature, right (Y page 145) Rear control panel To set the temperature (Y page 145) Display To set the airflow (Y page 146) Climate control Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control 142 Operating the climate control systems Optimum use of 3-zone automatic climate control Climate control 3-zone automatic climate control The following contains instructions and recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your 3-zone automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à rocker switch. The indicator lamp above the à rocker switch lights up. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is not activated automatically in automatic mode. If necessary, activate this function (Y page 143). RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. The residual heat function is switched off when the ignition is switched on. AGILITY SELECT switch You can choose between various drive programs with the AGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 167). If you have selected the drive program E, the climate control switches to Eco mode. In Eco mode: Rthe cooling output is reduced when cooling Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is deactivated and heat output is reduced as a result Rthe rear window defroster running time is reduced If you have selected the drive program C, S or S+ the climate control switches to Comfort mode. The current climate control settings are maintained in Comfort mode. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 162). Operating the climate control systems Switching climate control on/off General notes When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off climate control only briefly Switch on climate control primarily using the à rocker switch (Y page 144). Switching on/off Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To switch on: press the t/! rocker switch up or down. The Audio 20/COMAND climate control menu opens. X Activate the climate control using the airconditioning function bar; see the separate Audio 20/COMAND operating instructions. or X Set the airflow to level 1 or higher using the H button. X Operating the climate control systems Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification General notes If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. Activating/deactivating X To activate: press the ¿ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up. or X Activate the cooling with air dehumidification function via Audio 20/COMAND (see the separate operating instructions). X To deactivate: press the ¿ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch goes out. or X Deactivate the cooling with air dehumidification function via Audio 20/COMAND (see the separate operating instructions). Climate control To switch off: press the t/! rocker switch up or down. The Audio 20/COMAND climate control menu opens. X Deactivate the climate control using the air-conditioning function bar; see the separate Audio 20/COMAND operating instructions. or X Set the airflow to level 0 using the H rocker switch. X 143 144 Operating the climate control systems Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Climate control The indicator lamp in Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a the ¿ button malfunction. flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. remains off. The cooling with air dehumidification function can also no longer be activated using Audio 20/ COMAND (see the separate operating instructions). Setting climate control to automatic General notes In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The automatic mode functions optimally when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function must be activated manually in automatic mode. If necessary, "Cooling with air dehumidification" can also be deactivated. If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly. Automatic control Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Set the desired temperature using the w rocker switch on the front control unit. or X Set the desired temperature using Audio 20/COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X To activate: press rocker switch à up or down. The indicator lamp above the à rocker switch lights up. X To switch to manual operation: press the H rocker switch up or down. or X Set the airflow using Audio 20/COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. or X Press the top or bottom section of the _ rocker switch. or X Set the air distribution using Audio 20/ COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. The indicator lamp above the à rocker switch goes out. X Operating the climate control systems In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow or air distribution manually, the indicator lamp above the à rocker switch goes out. The function which has not been changed manually, however, continues to be controlled automatically. When the manually set function switches back to automatic mode, the indicator lamp above the à rocker switch lights up again. 145 3-zone automatic climate control General notes Adjusting the climate mode settings FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly cooler MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly warmer and with less of a draft X To set: set the climate mode using Audio 20/COMAND (see separate operating instructions). Setting the temperature Dual-zone automatic climate control Different temperatures can be set for the driver's and front-passenger sides. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To increase/reduce: press the upper or lower section of the w rocker switch. or X Set the temperature using Audio 20/ COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). 3-zone automatic climate control zones You can select different temperature settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the rear compartment. Setting the temperature in the front compartment using the front control panel X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To increase/reduce: press the upper or lower section of the w rocker switch. or X Set the temperature using Audio 20/ COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). Setting the temperature in the rear compartment using the front control panel X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Set the temperature with the w rocker switch on the front control panel. or X Set the temperature using Audio 20/ COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). Climate control This function is only available with 3-zone automatic climate control on vehicles for Canada. In automatic mode you can select the following airflow settings for the driver's and frontpassenger areas: Operating the climate control systems 146 Press the top or bottom section of the ! rocker switch. The climate control menu in Audio 20/ COMAND opens. X Select the "Synchronization" function; see separate Audio 20/COMAND operating instructions. The temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side and the rear compartment. Climate control X Setting the temperature in the rear compartment using the rear control panel X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To increase/reduce: press the upper or lower section of the w rocker switch on the rear control panel (Y page 141). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). The set temperature appears on the rearcompartment display. Setting the air distribution Air distribution settings ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents P Directs air through the center and side air vents O Directs air through the footwell air vents S Directs air through the center, side and footwell vents a Directs air through the defroster and footwell vents _ Directs air through the defroster, center, side and footwell vents b Directs air through the defroster, center and side air vents W Sets the air distribution to automatic Adjusting 3-zone automatic climate control: you can set the air distribution separately for the driver's and front-passenger side. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 (Y page 157). X Press the _ button up or down. The various air distribution settings appear in Audio 20/COMAND. X Press and hold the _ button upwards until the desired position is reached. or X Set the air distribution using Audio 20/ COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. Setting the airflow Dual-zone automatic climate control Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To increase/reduce: press the upper or lower section of the H rocker switch. or X Set the airflow using Audio 20/COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X 3-zone automatic climate control Adjusting the front-compartment airflow You can set the airflow separately for the front and rear compartment. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To increase/reduce: press the upper or lower section of the H rocker switch. or X Set the airflow using Audio 20/COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. Operating the climate control systems Setting the rear compartment airflow using the rear control panel X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To increase/reduce: press the upper or lower section of the K/I rocker switch on the rear control panel. The selected airflow level set is shown in the rear-compartment display. Switching the synchronization function on/off Activating/deactivating Dual-zone automatic climate control Press the upper or lower section of the 0 rocker switch. The indicator lamp in the 0 rocker switch lights up or goes out. or X Activate/deactivate the synchronization function using Audio 20/COMAND; see the separate operating instructions). X The synchronization function deactivates if the settings for the front-passenger side are changed. 3-zone automatic climate control X Activate/deactivate the synchronization function using Audio 20/COMAND; see the separate operating instructions). The synchronization function is deactivated: Rif the settings for the front-passenger side are changed Rif the settings for the rear compartment are changed Defrosting the windshield General notes General notes Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The temperature setting is adopted for the front-passenger side. For 3-zone automatic climate control, the temperature setting is adopted for the front-passenger side and rear compartment. You can use this function to defrost the windshield or to defrost the inside of the windshield and the front side windows. Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function as soon as the windshield is clear again. Activating/deactivating the defrosting function for the windshield Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To activate: press the ¬ rocker switch on the front control unit up or down. The indicator lamp above the ¬ rocker switch lights up. The current climate control settings are deactivated. X Climate control Setting the rear compartment airflow X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Press the top or bottom section of the ! rocker switch. The Audio 20/COMAND climate control menu opens. X Select the "Synchronization" function in the climate control menu; see separate Audio 20/COMAND operating instructions. The airflow setting for the front area is adopted for the rear compartment. 147 Operating the climate control systems 148 The climate control system switches to the following functions: airflow temperature Rair distribution to the windshield and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off i If necessary, the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. In this case, the indicator lamp above the ¿ button remains switched off. X To deactivate: press the ¬ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the ¬ rocker switch goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. or X Press the top or bottom section of the à rocker switch. i If you clean the windows regularly, they do not fog up so quickly. Rhigh Climate control Rhigh Defrosting the windows Windows fogged up on the inside X Activate the cooling with air dehumidification function with the ¿ rocker switch. or Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function via Audio 20/COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X Switch on automatic mode using the à rocker switch. X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the "Windshield defrosting" function using the ¬ rocker switch. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. X Windows fogged up on the outside X X Activate the windshield wipers. Switch on automatic mode using the à rocker switch. Rear window defroster General notes The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off. Activating/deactivating Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Press the ¤ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the ¤ rocker switch lights up or goes out. X Operating the climate control systems 149 Problems with the rear window defroster Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged. defroster has deactiva- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading ted prematurely or canlamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. not be activated. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster can be activated again. General notes You can also temporarily deactivate the flow of fresh air manually if unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can fog up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows from fogging up. Activating/deactivating Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To activate: press the g rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the g rocker switch lights up. X Air-recirculation mode switches on automatically: Rat high outside temperatures Rat high levels of pollution (3-zone automatic climate control only) Rin a tunnel (vehicles with a navigation system only) The indicator lamp above the g rocker switch is not lit when automatic air-recirculation mode is activated. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. X To deactivate: press the g rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the g rocker switch goes out. Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated Activating/deactivating the residual heat function General notes The residual heat function is only available with 3-zone automatic climate control on vehicles for Canada. Once the engine is switched off, it is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating or ventilating the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes. The heating or ventilation time depends on the interior temperature that has been set. Climate control Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode Operating the climate control systems 150 Switching on/off Dispose of full perfume vials in an environmentally responsible manner and take them to a special waste collection point. Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it (Y page 157). X To activate: press the ! rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the ! rocker switch lights up. Climate control X The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. X To deactivate: press the ! rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the ! rocker switch goes out. Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately 30 minutes the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops Rwhen : Perfume lid ; Perfume vial The perfume atomizer helps to improve driving comfort. Using Audio 20/COMAND, you can: Rswitch Perfume atomizer Operating the perfume atomizer G WARNING If children open the perfume vial, they could drink the perfume or it could come into contact with their eyes. There is a risk of injury. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consult a doctor. If perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with clean water. If you continue to experience difficulties, consult a doctor. H Environmental note Full perfume vials must not be disposed of with household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. the perfume atomizer on and off (see separate Audio 20/COMAND operating instructions) Rregulate the perfume atomizer (see the separate Audio 20/COMAND operating instructions) The following conditions can affect your perception of the perfume intensity: Roperating mode of the climate control system Rinterior temperature Rtime of year/day Rair humidity Rphysiological condition of occupants, e.g. fatigue or hunger The perfume atomizer can only be operated when the climate control system is switched on and is only active when the glove box is closed. The perfume atomizer is provided with a prefilled perfume vial. You can also choose from a variety of filled perfume vials and an empty vial which you can fill yourself. Operating the climate control systems 151 If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe the separate information sheet attached to the vial. ! If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging. Climate control Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when it is empty. Dispose of the used vial after use. X To insert the perfume vial: open the glove box (Y page 299). X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go. X To remove the perfume vial: pull out the perfume vial. To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lid of the empty perfume vial to refill it yourself. X Refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml of the desired liquid perfume. X Screw the lid back on to the vial. X ! Only refill the vial when you are outside the vehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfume could drip into the interior and contaminate it. Always refill the empty refillable vial with the same perfume. Otherwise, you might not achieve optimum results from the perfume atomizer. Z 152 Setting the air vents Problems with the perfume atomizer Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Climate control The vehicle interior is The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as it not perfumed although will go. the perfume atomizer is X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go. activated. The perfume vial has not been adequately filled. X Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial. X Use a new pre-filled vial. X Refillable vials: refill the vial with a maximum of 15 ml of the same perfume. The perfume atomizer is faulty. X Have the perfume atomizer checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Ionization Ionization is used to purify the air in the vehicle interior and attain an improved interior climate. The ionization of the interior air is odorless and cannot be perceived directly in the vehicle interior. You can switch ionization on/off using Audio 20/COMAND (see the separate operating instructions). Ionization can only be operated when the automatic climate control is switched on. The side air vent on the driver's side must be open. Setting the air vents Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air out- lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior. Setting the center air vents Setting the air vents 153 To open/close: turn thumbwheel ?, A or B to the left or right as far as it will go. X To adjust the air direction: hold center air vent :, ; or = by thumbwheel ?, A or B and move it up or down or to the left or right. X Vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control : Rear-compartment air vent, left ; Rear-compartment air vent, right = Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel ? Rear control panel To open/close: turn thumbwheel = to the left or right as far as it will go. X To adjust the air direction: hold rear air vent : or ; by the middle fin and move up or down or to the left or right. X : Side window defroster vent ; Side air vent, left = Thumbwheel for left side air vent To open/close: turn thumbwheel = to the left or right as far as it will go. X To adjust the air direction: hold side air vent ; by thumbwheel = and move it up or down or to the left or right. X Setting the rear-compartment air vents Rear air vents are not available in all vehicles. Vehicles with dual-zone automatic climate control Z Climate control Setting the side air vents 154 155 Useful information ............................ 156 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ............................................................. 156 Automatic transmission ................... 164 Refueling ............................................ 171 Parking ............................................... 174 Driving tips ........................................ 178 Driving systems ................................ 183 Driving and parking Driving ............................................... 156 156 Driving Useful information Driving and parking i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Important safety notes The sensor system of some driving and driving safety systems adjusts automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed. You should also observe these notes on breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Always observe the respective speed limits. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. G WARNING The first 1000 miles (1500 km) The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future. RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles (1500 km). RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this period. RWhen changing gears manually, change up in good time, before the tachometer needle reaches Ô of the way to the red area of the tachometer. Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. Rshoes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake Driving G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. Rlose ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has reached operating temperature. Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train. SmartKey positions SmartKey i The SmartKey can be turned in the igni- tion lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started. Vehicles with AIRPANEL: you can open the shutters in the radiator trim, by turning the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. After approximately 120 seconds the shutters open automatically. Further information on opening and cleaning the shutters (Y page 334). Start/Stop button General notes A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the engine. To start the vehicle without actively using the SmartKey: Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle. Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 81). Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different SmartKey positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith g To remove the SmartKey 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windshield wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the engine electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey. Z Driving and parking boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. 157 Driving and parking 158 Driving The Start/Stop button can be removed from the ignition lock. Then, you can insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time: Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button. Ryou will not be able to start the engine with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again. If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button on the front door (Y page 87), you can continue to start the engine with the Start/ Stop button. You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle: Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ Stop button Rthe electrically powered equipment can be operated The engine can be turned off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for approximately three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. imately two seconds recognition time. You can then use Start/Stop button :. As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after starting the engine or lights up while driving, see (Y page 285). If Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey being removed from the ignition. X Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition lock ;. To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button : once. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example. The power supply is switched off again if: X Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in this position To switch on the ignition: press Start/ Stop button : twice. The ignition is switched on. The power supply is switched off again if: X Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button : once when in this position SmartKey positions with the Start/Stop button = Start/Stop button USA ? Start/Stop button Canada When you insert Start/Stop button : into ignition lock ;, the system needs approx- Driving Important safety notes General notes The catalytic converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the engine may change during this time. G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Automatic transmission Ropen X the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Rshifting G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. ! Do not depress the accelerator when starting the engine. Shift the transmission to position P (Y page 164). The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P (Y page 166). You can also start the engine when the transmission is in position N. Starting procedure with the SmartKey To start the engine using the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition (Y page 157) lock and release it as soon as the engine is running. If the engine will not start: Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Reinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock after a short waiting period. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up (Y page 284). X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 157) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X Starting procedure with the Start/Stop button The Start/Stop button is only available on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESSGO start function. The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/ Stop button must be inserted in the ignition Z Driving and parking Starting the engine 159 Driving Driving and parking 160 lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function. You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time. Pay attention to the important safety notes. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 157). The engine starts. It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock released. If the brake pedal is not depressed, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature, see the Digital Operator's Manual. i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Pulling away Automatic transmission G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. ! If a warning tone sounds and the Release Park. Brake message appears in the multifunction display, the parking brake is still applied. Release the parking brake. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. X Release the brake pedal. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. The electric parking brake (Y page 176) is automatically released. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Remove your foot from the brake pedal. The vehicle is then held for about a second. X Pull away. X Hill start assist is not active if: Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient. transmission is in position N. Rthe Driving electric parking brake is applied. is malfunctioning. RESP® ECO start/stop function Introduction The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away. General notes : ECO start/stop display If the engine has been switched off automatically by the ECO start/stop function, the è symbol is shown in the multifunction display. Every time you switch on the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO start/stop function is activated. Automatic engine switch-off If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. The ECO start/stop function is operational when: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green. Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system. Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature. Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached. Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. Rthe system detects that the windshield is not fogged up when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe hood is closed. Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened. All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is stopped automatically. The HOLD function can also be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. The engine can be switched off automatically a maximum of four times (first stop and three subsequent stops) in succession. Automatic engine start The engine starts automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button. Ryou switch to drive program S+. Rin transmission position D or N the brake pedal is released and the HOLD function is not active. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. Z Driving and parking Rthe 161 Driving 162 Driving and parking Ryou engage reverse gear R. Ryou move the transmission out of position P. Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door. Rthe vehicle starts to roll. Rthe brake system requires this. Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range. Rthe system detects moisture on the windshield when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low. Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine. Deactivating/activating the ECO start/ stop function To switch off: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. X To switch on: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. X If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. Selecting drive program S+ deactivates the ECO start/stop function. If you press ECO button :, the ECO start/stop function is activated. Driving 163 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply. X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the SmartKey in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 159). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 349). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. Try to start the engine again (Y page 159). X If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical component of the engine management system. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The coolant temperature gauge shows a value above 248 ‡ (120 †). The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down. X Check the coolant level (Y page 327). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary. Z Driving and parking Problems with the engine 164 Automatic transmission Automatic transmission Driving and parking Important safety notes DIRECT SELECT lever Overview of transmission positions G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Bear in mind that the power transmission between the engine and the transmission is interrupted when the engine is switched off. For this reason, shift the automatic transmission to P when the engine is switched off and the vehicle is at a standstill. Apply the electric parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. j k i h Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display in the multifunction display (Y page 166). Engaging park position P ! If the engine speed is too high or the vehi- cle is moving, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. The automatic transmission could otherwise be damaged. j Park position with parking lock k Reverse gear Automatic transmission X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P. Engaging park position P automatically Park position P is automatically engaged if: Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey. Ryou switch off the engine using the Start/ Stop button and open the driver's door. Ryou open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R. Engaging reverse gear R ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. If the transmission is in position D or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. X The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. Further information on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 161). Shifting to neutral N G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Rshifting If the transmission is in position D or R: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. X If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. With the SmartKey: if you then open one of the front doors or remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open one of the front doors, the automatic transmission shifts to P. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: Using the SmartKey: Switch on the ignition. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X X Z Driving and parking i Neutral h Drive 165 Automatic transmission 166 With the Start/Stop button: Switch on the ignition. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Driving and parking X The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can change using the DIRECT SELECT lever. Transmission positions B Engaging drive position D If the transmission is in position R or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. X Park position This prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Do not shift the transmission into position P (Y page 164) unless the vehicle is stationary. The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. Always apply the electronic parking brake in addition to the parking lock in order to secure the vehicle. The automatic transmission shifts to P automatically if you: Rremove the SmartKey Rswitch off the engine when in R or D and open one of the front doors If the vehicle electronics are malfunctioning, the transmission may be locked in position P. Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission position and drive program display ! If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program E or S. : Status symbol drive program ; Transmission position = Gear C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. Automatic transmission ! Rolling in neutral N can damage the drive train. Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. 7 Driving tips Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This automatic gear shifting behavior is determined by: Rthe selected drive program (Y page 167) position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Rthe Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts throttle: late upshifts Rmore Double-clutch function When shifting down, the double-clutch function is active regardless of the currently selected drive program. The double-clutch function reduces load change reactions and is conducive to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by the double-clutch function depends on the drive program selected. Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. X Rocking the vehicle free Rocking the vehicle free by shifting back and forth between transmission positions D and R can help to free a vehicle that has become stuck in mud or snow. The vehicle's engine management restricts switching between transmission positions D and R to speeds up to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h). To shift back and forth between transmission positions D and R, move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down past the point of resistance. AGILITY SELECT switch Use the AGILITY SELECT switch to change the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected the following vehicle characteristics will change: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension Rthe steering Z Driving and parking Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brakes will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. If you switch off the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the automatic transmission shifts to neutral N automatically. A 167 Automatic transmission 168 Driving and parking Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function (Y page 161) Rthe climate control settings - Dual-zone automatic climate control (Y page 140) - vehicles for Canada: three-zone automatic climate control (Y page 142) Rthe rear window defroster operation period (Y page 148) Rthe performance of the seat heating (Y page 112) Each time you start the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is activated. For further information about starting the engine, see (Y page 159). C Comfort Comfortable and economical driving characteristics E Eco Particularly economical driving characteristics Additional information for drive programs (Y page 168). Using the steering wheel paddle shifters, you can temporarily change gears yourself. For further information on the manual drive program (Y page 169). Drive programs Drive program I (Individual) In drive program I the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Rthe X Push AGILITY SELECT switch : up or down, until the desired drive program is selected. The selected drive program appears in the multifunction display. After five seconds the display goes out and the status icon of the selected drive program appears. In addition, the current drive program settings are displayed in the Audio 20/ COMAND display. Available drive programs: I Individual Individual settings S+ Sport Plus Extremely sporty driving characteristics S Sport Sporty driving characteristics drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension Rthe steering To permanently select the gears in the drive program I using the steering wheel paddle shifters, select the permanent manual gearshift program. Information about the selection of drive program I with COMAND or Audio 20 can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Drive program S+ (Sport Plus) Drive program S+ is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle delivers extremely sporty handling characteristics Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points Automatic transmission suspension exhibits particularly stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC) Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available Drive program S (Sport) Drive program S is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving characteristics Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points Rthe suspension exhibits hard springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC) Drive program C (Comfort) Drive program C is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical handling characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Drive program E (Eco) Drive program E is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits comfortable, economical handling characteristics Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Rduring deceleration, the engine is disconnected from the drive train. The vehicle uses kinetic energy and consumes less fuel (overrun mode). Rthe performance of air-conditioning system and heating are reduced Manual gear shifting General notes : Left steering wheel paddle shifter: shifts down ; Right steering wheel paddle shifter: shifts up Using the steering wheel paddle shifters, you can temporarily change gears yourself. The transmission must be in position D. Z Driving and parking Rthe 169 Automatic transmission 170 Activating X Driving and parking X Shift the transmission to position D. Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 169). Manual gear shifting is activated temporarily. The selected gear appears in the multifunction display. Shifting gears Pulling on the left or right steering wheel paddle shifter, allows you to shift gears yourself for a limited time. Depending on which paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear down or up, if permitted. X To shift up: pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 169). The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. If the maximum engine speed on the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage. X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 169). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. Automatic down shifting occurs when coasting. Shift recommendation The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear ; according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Deactivating If you have activated manual gear shifting, it will remain active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain. If manual gear shifting is deactivated, the gears will be selected automatically. You can also deactivate manual gear selection: X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter and hold it in place (Y page 169). or X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. or X Use the AGILITY SELECT switch to change the drive program (Y page 167). Manual gear selection is deactivated. Refueling 171 Problems with the transmission Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no X Stop the vehicle. longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Transfer case This section is only valid for vehicles with 4wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always transmitted to both axles. ! Performance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system or transfer case could otherwise be damaged. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a performance test. ! To prevent ESP® from intervening, the ignition must be switched off (SmartKey or the Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1) if: Rthe electric parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer. Rthe vehicle is being towed with only one axle raised (not permitted for vehicles with 4MATIC). The brake system could otherwise be damaged. Refueling Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. Z Driving and parking Problem 172 Refueling If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: Driving and parking RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel. G WARNING Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged. If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. For further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 397). Refueling General information Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 171). If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside, the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. Opening the fuel filler flap Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. ! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection system could be blocked by particles from the fuel can. : ; = ? To open the fuel filler flap To insert the fuel filler cap Tire pressure table Fuel type to be used Switch off the engine. Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X X Refueling Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap swings up. X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the inside of fuel filler flap ;. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. 173 Driving and parking X Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. Closing the fuel filler flap Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. X Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A message appears in the multifunction display (Y page 270). Z 174 Parking Problems with fuel and the fuel tank Driving and parking Problem Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. The fuel filler flap cannot be opened. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G WARNING The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. Risk of explosion or fire. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. or The SmartKey battery is discharged. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 81). or X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 83). The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Parking G WARNING Important safety notes If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. Parking Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged. To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. Rthe transmission must be in position P and the SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock. Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients. Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at the front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for example, on uphill or downhill gradients. Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at the rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, for example, on uphill or downhill gradients. Switching off the engine Important safety notes G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- cle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Vehicles with automatic transmission Apply the electric parking brake. Shift the transmission to position P. X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobilizer is activated. X With the Start/Stop button: press the Start/Stop button (Y page 157). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to SmartKey position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to SmartKey position 0: "SmartKey removed". X X If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. With the SmartKey: if you then open one of the front doors or remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open one of the front doors, the automatic transmission shifts to P. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: Using the SmartKey: Switch on the ignition. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X X Z Driving and parking G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: 175 Parking 176 With the Start/Stop button: Switch on the ignition. Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Driving and parking X In the event of an emergency, the engine can be turned off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the onboard voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the released parking brake. If this is the case, only park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling away. X Shift the automatic transmission to position P. X It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The electric parking brake performs a function test at regular intervals while the engine is switched off. The sounds that can be heard while this is occurring are normal. Applying/releasing manually Electric parking brake General notes G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rshift X To apply: push handle :. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The electric parking brake can also be applied when the SmartKey is removed. Parking Rwhen the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157) or Rif the ignition was switched on using the Start/Stop button. Applying automatically The electric parking brake is applied automatically: Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a standstill or Rif the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary or Rif Active Parking Assist is holding the vehicle at a standstill In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine is switched off. Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt is not fastened. is a system malfunction. Rthe power supply is insufficient. Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The electric parking brake is not automatically engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Rthere Releasing automatically Your vehicle's electric parking brake is automatically released if all of the following conditions are met: Rthe engine is running. Rthe transmission is in position D or R. Rthe seat belt has been fastened. depress the accelerator pedal. If the transmission is in position R, the trunk lid must be closed. If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake: Ryou Rthe driver's door is closed. have shifted out of transmission position P or you have previously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h). Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move. Ryou Emergency braking The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake. X While driving, push handle : of the electric parking brake (Y page 176). The vehicle is braked as long as you keep handle : of the electric parking brake depressed. The longer the electric parking brake handle : is depressed, the greater the braking force. During braking: Ra warning tone sounds Please Release Parking Brake message appears Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is engaged. Rthe Parking the vehicle for a long period If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging and further damaged in the event of this occurring again. Z Driving and parking To release: pull handle :. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The electric parking brake can only be released: X 177 Driving tips 178 Connect a trickle charger. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. Driving and parking X Driving tips General driving tips Important safety notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equipment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. If you make a call while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before operating the telephone. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second. Drive sensibly – save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure. X Remove unnecessary loads. X Remove roof racks when they are not needed. X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds. X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. X Have all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or by the service interval display. X Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain. Drinking and driving G WARNING Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. Emission control G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits. These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. For this reason, all work on the engine must be carried out by qualified and authorized MercedesBenz technicians. The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at regular intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. ECO display range ?. The 8 warning lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up (Y page 291). The ECO display consists of three sections, with an inner and outer area. The sections correspond to the following three categories: : Acceleration (evaluation of all acceleration processes): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: sporty acceleration ; The ECO display shows you how economical your driving style is. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Your driving style can significantly influence the vehicle's consumption. Coasting (evaluation of all deceleration processes): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes. Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: frequent heavy braking = Constant (continuous evaluation over the entire journey): Rthe : ; = ? Acceleration Coasting Constant Additional range achieved Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. Start and represents the additional range achieved since the beginning of the journey as a result of an adapted driving style. If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve range, the Reserve Fuel message is shown in the multifunction display instead of outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: fluctuations in speed The three inner areas display the current driving style and light up green as a result of a particularly economical driving style. Depending on the driving situation, up to two areas may light up simultaneously. Z 179 Driving and parking Driving tips Driving and parking 180 Driving tips At the beginning of the journey, the three outer areas are empty and fill up as a result of economical driving. A higher level indicates a more economical driving style. If the three outer areas are completely filled at the same time, the driver has adopted the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. The ECO display border lights up. The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. The additionally achieved range displayed under Bonus fr. Start does not indicate a fixed consumption reduction. In addition to driving style, the actual consumption is affected by other factors, such as: Rload Rtire pressure start Rchoice of route Relectrical consumers switched on These factors are not included in the ECO display. An economical driving style specially requires driving at moderate engine speeds. Achieving a higher value in the categories "Acceleration" and "Constant": Rcold Robserve the gearshift recommendations. Rdrive the vehicle in drive program E (vehicles with the AGILITY SELECT switch) On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the highway, only the outer area for "constant" will change. The ECO display summarizes the driving style from the start of the journey to its completion. Therefore, there are more marked changes in the outer areas at the start of a journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For more marked changes, perform a manual rest (Y page 237). For further information on the ECO display, see (Y page 236). Braking Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients ! On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting early to a lower gear. This allows you to take advantage of the engine braking effect and helps avoid overheating and excessive wear of the brakes. When you take advantage of the engine braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface. This could cause damage to the drive train. This type of damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty. Heavy and light loads G WARNING If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. Wet roads If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water. You have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salttreated roads If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance. RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the brakes occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions. RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead. Servicing the brakes ! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and you hear a warning tone while the engine is running, the brake fluid level may be too low. Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display. The brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. Have the brake system checked immediately. This work should be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! A function or performance test should only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamom- eter. If you wish to operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center in advance. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system. ! The ESP® system operates automatically. The engine and the ignition must therefore be switched off (the SmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or the Start/Stop button must be in position 0 or 1) if the electric parking brake is tested on a brake dynamometer. Braking triggered automatically by ESP® may cause severe damage to the brake system. All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to arrange this. Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular intervals. Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 67) and BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) (Y page 67). For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends only installing the following brake disks and brake pads/linings: Rbrake disks that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz Rbrake pads/linings that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalent standard of quality Other brake disks or brake pads/linings can compromise the safety of your vehicle. Always replace all brake disks and brake pads/linings on an axle at the same time. Always install new brake pads/linings when replacing brake disks. The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brake disks to which the wheel assembly with rim and threaded connection is matched. Z 181 Driving and parking Driving tips Driving and parking 182 Driving tips The use of brake disks other than those approved by Mercedes-Benz can change the track width and is subject to approval, if applicable. Shock-type loads when handling the brake disks, such as when changing wheels, can lead to a reduction in comfort when driving with lightweight brake disks. Avoid shocktype loads on the lightweight brake disks, particularly on the brake plate. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake fluid which has not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. Driving on wet roads Hydroplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds. tires have adequate tread depth. For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following manner: Rthe Rlower your speed. ruts. Ravoid sudden steering movements. Rbrake carefully. Ravoid Driving on flooded roads ! Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. Failure to observe these notes may result in damage to the engine, electrical systems and transmission. If you have to drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rthe water level, in the case of still water, may not exceed a maximum point of the lower edge of the vehicle body Ryou should drive no faster than at a walking pace Winter driving G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind. Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Shift the transmission to position N. Driving systems Driving systems Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for innovative driver assistance and safety systems which enhance comfort and support the driver in critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a milestone on the path towards autonomous driving. Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all elements of active and passive safety in one well thought out system – for the safety of the vehicle occupants and that of other road users. Further information on driving safety systems (Y page 66). Cruise control General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Z Driving and parking The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing weather conditions. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 361). For more information on driving with summer tires, see (Y page 360). Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 360). 183 184 Driving systems Driving and parking Cruise control lever Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. X i Cruise control may be unable to maintain : ; = ? To activate or increase speed To activate or reduce speed To deactivate cruise control To activate at the current speed/last stored speed When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. In addition, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display. In the speedometer, the segments between the stored speed and the maximum speed light up. Storing and maintaining the current speed You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. Storing the current speed or call up the last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it is lower than the current speed, the vehicle decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the X Driving systems speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. 185 Deactivating cruise control Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h) RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Ryou shift the transmission to position N while driving If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐ trol Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Ryou i When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared. DISTRONIC PLUS General notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. Z Driving and parking Setting a speed Driving and parking 186 Driving systems Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in front or take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the responsible authorities. You can refer to the relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions are asked about this. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Important safety notes G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: Rpeople or animals Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- ped or parked vehicles and crossing traffic As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Roncoming G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic situations. In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident. Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, in particular when warned to do so by DISTRONIC PLUS. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action. Driving systems is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: This speed may: Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or an exit lane Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehicles driving on the left (left-hand drive countries) Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehicles driving on the right (right-hand drive countries) If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Cruise control lever Rin Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else To activate or increase speed To activate or reduce speed To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS To activate at the current speed/last stored speed A To set the specified minimum distance : ; = ? Selecting DISTRONIC PLUS covering the sensors is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example, in parking garages If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the stored speed. Rthere X Check whether LIM indicator lamp : is off. Z Driving and parking ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function 187 Driving systems Driving and parking 188 If it is off, DISTRONIC PLUS is already selected. If it is not, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow ;. LIM indicator lamp : in the cruise control lever goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed, or down = for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. or To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : past the pressure point for a higher speed, or down = for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. X Activating DISTRONIC PLUS Activation conditions In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to two minutes after pulling away before DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. Rthe electric parking brake must be released. RESP® must be active, but not intervening. RActive Parking Assist must not be activated. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors must be closed. Activating i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h). X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ; or press it up : or down =. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Activating at the current speed/last stored speed G WARNING Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ; or press it up : or down =. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly X If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you Driving systems do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. 189 vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed. facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle then brakes automatically. There is a risk of an accident. Be ready to brake at all times. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value. X Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS Pulling away and driving If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored. Selecting the drive program DISTRONIC Plus supports a sporty driving style when you have selected the S or S+ driving program (Y page 168). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the C or E driving program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stop-and-start traffic. Changing lanes If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC PLUS supports you when: Ryou If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no X are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS monitors the left lane on left-hand drive Z Driving and parking i The vehicle can also pull away when it is 190 Driving systems vehicles and the right lane on right-hand drive vehicles. Driving and parking Stopping G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away. For further information on deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 192). If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. The electric parking brake automatically secures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and: Rthe seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- matically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission may be shifted into position P automatically. Setting a speed Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ;, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Driving systems You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 191). DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instrument cluster Displays in the speedometer Driving and parking Setting the specified minimum distance i Make sure that you maintain the mini- mum distance to the vehicle in front as required by law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments between the speed of the vehicle in front : and stored speed ; light up. The segments likewise light up if a vehicle in front is detected in the fast lane. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. To increase: turn control ; in direction =. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X 191 Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator, current distance to the vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the vehi- cle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle In the Assistance menu (Y page 244) of the on-board computer, you can select the assistance graphics display. Z Driving systems 192 Driving and parking X Select the Assistance Info Display function using the on-board computer (Y page 243). Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards : or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. : DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears when the cruise control lever is actuated) ; Vehicle in front, if detected = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle In the Assistance menu (Y page 244) of the on-board computer, you can select the assistance graphics display. X Select the Assistance Info Display function using the on-board computer (Y page 243). You will see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the frontpassenger door or one of the rear doors is open Rthe vehicle has skidded Ryou activate Active Parking Assist If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS General notes Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations: RCornering, going into and coming out of a bend RVehicles traveling on a different line ROther vehicles changing lanes RNarrow vehicles Driving systems RObstructions and stationary vehicles vehicles In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. 193 Other vehicles changing lanes Cornering, going into and coming out of a bend DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. Narrow vehicles The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. Vehicles traveling on a different line DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehicle in front on the edge of the road, because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Obstructions and stationary vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles traveling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the Z Driving and parking RCrossing 194 Driving systems detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. Driving and parking Crossing vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot General notes DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle in the center of the driving lane by means of moderate steering interventions in a speed range from 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h). It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of camera system : at the top of the windshield. At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h) Steering Assist focuses on clear lane markings (left and right). In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h) Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into account lane markings, e.g. when following vehicles in a traffic jam. If these conditions are not present, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide assistance. DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for the function to be available. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traffic conditions and does not detect all road users. If you are following a vehicle which is driving towards the edge of the road, your vehicle could come into contact with the curb or other road boundaries. In the case of deviations in road markings, beware of other road users, e.g. cyclists that are in the direct vicinity of your vehicle. Obstacles such as building site huts on the lane or projecting out into the lane are not detected. An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehi- cle back to the lane. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road The system is switched to passive and no longer assists you by performing steering interventions if: Ryou actively change lane Ryou switch on the turn signal Rtake your hands off the steering wheel or do not steer for a prolonged period of time i After you have finished changing lanes, Pay attention also to the important safety notes for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186). The steering interventions are carried out with a limited steering moment. The system requires the driver to keep his hands on the steering wheel and to steer himself. If you do not steer yourself or if take your hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged period of time, the system will first alert you with a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol appears in the multifunction display. If you have still not started to steer and have not taken hold of the steering wheel after five seconds at the latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you to take control of the vehicle. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot switch to passive mode. DISTRONIC PLUS remains active. Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. The DTR+: Steering Assist. On message appears in the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are automatically active again. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide assistance: Ron very sharp corners Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed. Z 195 Driving and parking Driving systems 196 Driving systems Driving and parking Information in the multifunction display Important safety notes G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated but is not ready for a steering intervention, steering wheel symbol : appears in gray. If the system provides you with support by means of steering interventions, symbol : is shown in green. Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. The DTR+: Steering Assist. Off message appears in the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated. When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated automatically. HOLD function General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if all of the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe vehicle is stationary. engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened. Rthe electric parking brake is released. Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N. RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. Rthe Driving systems Activating the HOLD function 197 The electric parking brake automatically secures the vehicle if the HOLD function is activated and: Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until : appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. X i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R. Rthe transmission is in position P. Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until : disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. The HOLD function is then deactivated. driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission may be shifted into position P automatically. AIRMATIC General notes AIRMATIC is an air suspension with variable damping for improved driving comfort. Allround level control ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. There is also the option to manually adjust the vehicle level. AIRMATIC consists of level setting, level control and the Adaptive Damping System ADS. The vehicle level can be set using the AGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 167) or the level button (Y page 198). The setting always corresponds to the last selected function. Important safety notes G WARNING When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury. Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. Z Driving and parking Rthe Driving systems 198 i If one of the doors is open, the vehicle is not lowered. Driving and parking Vehicle level Setting the raised vehicle level Setting the normal vehicle level X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is lit: X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the currently selected drive program (Y page 167). Suspension tuning General notes The Adaptive Damping System automatically controls the calibration of the dampers. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: It is possible to choose between the "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels below a speed 50 mph (80 km/h). Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is not lit: Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle is raised by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to the normal level. The Vehicle Rising message appears in the multifunction display. i The message disappears after ten seconds, irrespective of the level reached. If necessary, the vehicle is raised further. The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you: X Rdrive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h). for approximately three minutes at a speed over 50 mph (80 km/h). The "Raised level" remains active when you are not driving within these speed ranges. Rdrive Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or comfort Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Rthe Sports tuning In the "Sport" and "Sport Plus" drive programs, the firmer suspension setting ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Select the S or S+ drive program with the AGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 167). The vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to the normal level. Comfort tuning In the "Eco" and "Comfort" drive programs, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style. Select comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of highway. X Select the E or C drive program with the AGILITY SELECT switch (Y page 167). The vehicle is raised to the normal level. When driving at speeds above 80 mph (125 km/h), the vehicle is automatically lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) in the E and C drive programs. When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h) the vehicle is raised again. 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP®, it improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. less when driving. RAccelerate ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary. PARKTRONIC Important safety notes PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition the transmission to position D, R or N PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. Rshift Range of the sensors General notes PARKTRONIC does not take objects into consideration that are: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani- mals or objects. the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps. Rabove Z 199 Driving and parking Driving systems 200 Driving systems Driving and parking Rear sensors Center Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) Minimum distance : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example) Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm) Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm) If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. Warning displays : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 334). Front sensors Center Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle = Segments showing operational readiness The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is in the instrument cluster. The warning display for the rear area is located on the headliner in the rear compartment. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red seg- Driving systems Transmission position Warning display D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle is rolling backwards Rear and front areas activated P No areas activated One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. If indicator lamp : is on then PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also deactivated. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Vehicles without AIRMATIC : To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC ; Indicator lamp If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also deactivated. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC Vehicles with AIRMATIC : Indicator lamp ; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC Z Driving and parking ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if operational readiness indicator = lights up. The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running. 201 202 Driving systems Problems with PARKTRONIC Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated and the indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 334). warning displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. Active Parking Assist General notes Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention and brake application can assist you during parking and when exiting a parking space. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 199). Important safety notes Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the maneuvering range. When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable. G WARNING While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could result in a collision with another road user. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires. Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate parking spaces which are not suitable for parking, for example: Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Ron unsuitable surfaces Driving systems ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park- ing space as possible. spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly. RParking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 200) warning messages during the parking procedure. RYou can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist will then be canceled. RWhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. RMake sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle. Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: RParking Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement Rthat G WARNING If there are objects above the detection range: RActive Park Assist may steer too early vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. You may cause a collision as a result. There is a risk of an accident. If there are objects above the detection range, stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist. Rthe For further information on the detection range (Y page 199). Active Parking Assist does not assist you parking in spaces at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next to one another Rthe parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a low curb Ryou park forwards Active Parking Assist does not assist you parking in spaces that are parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rthe parking space is on a curb system reads the parking space as being blocked, for example by foliage or grass paving blocks Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneuver into Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer Rthe Detecting parking spaces Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. Z Driving and parking Parking tips: 203 Driving and parking 204 Driving systems : Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Active Parking Assist is switched on automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehicle Rthat are at right angles to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehicle Rthat er's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain switched on until you acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist by pressing the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The system automatically determines whether the parking space is parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel. A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. Parking G WARNING If you leave the vehicle when it is only being braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it against rolling away. i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically during the parking process. You are responsible for braking in good time. i Note that Active Parking Assist cannot measure the length of a parking space if it is at right angles to the direction of travel. You will need to judge whether your vehicle will fit in the parking space. When driving at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. By default, Active Parking Assist only displays parking spaces on the frontpassenger side. Parking spaces on the driv- Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Shift the transmission to position R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: % message appears in the multifunction display. X X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To park using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When backing up, drive at a speed below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the rear border of the parking space. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces. X The Park Assist Active Select D Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Shift the transmission to position D while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the front border of the parking space. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces. The Park Assist Active Select R Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist Switched Off message appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle is now parked. The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled when you depress the accelerator pedal. Active Parking Assist no longer supports you with steering interventions and brake applications. When Active Parking Assist is finished, you must steer and brake again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available. Parking tips: RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Active Parking Assist guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. RYou can also select preselect transmission position D. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should the transmission change take place too early, the parking procedure will be canceled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position. Exiting a parking space In order that Active Parking Assist can support you when you exit the parking space: Rthe border of the parking space must be high enough at the front and the rear. A curb is too small, for example. Rthe border of the parking space must not be too wide, as the position of the vehicle must not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting Z 205 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems Driving and parking 206 position as it is maneuvering into the parking space. Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft (1.0 m) must be available. Active Parking Assist can only assist you with exiting a parking space if you have parked the vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using Active Parking Assist. i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst the vehicle exits the parking space. You are responsible for braking in good time. Start the engine. Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you are pulling away. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: % message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To exit a parking space using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking space. Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled. X Depending on the message or as required, shift the transmission to position D or R. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist active Accelerate and brake Observe surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X X i You will achieve the best results by wait- ing for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. If you back up after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. X Drive forwards and back up as prompted by the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary. Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the Park Assist switched off message appears in the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic on your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over the steering, before the vehicle has exited the parking space completely. This is useful, for example when you recognize that it is already possible to pull out of the parking space. Canceling Active Parking Assist X Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once. The Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. or X Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 201). PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Parking Assist is immediately canceled. The Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. Active Parking Assist is canceled automatically if: Rthe electric parking brake is engaged Rtransmission position P is selected Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no longer possible Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The ÷ warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol disappears and the multifunction display shows the Park Assist Canceled message. When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must steer and brake again yourself. If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the accelerator again. Rear view camera General notes Rear view camera : is in the trunk lid handle. Rear view camera : is an optical parking and maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle with guide lines in the Audio 20/ COMAND display. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear view mirror. i The text shown in the Audio 20/COMAND display depends on the language setting. The following are examples of rear view camera messages in the Audio 20/ COMAND display. Important safety notes diate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. Under the following circumstances, the rear view camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif the trunk lid is open heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 334) Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack). Rin i The rear view camera is protected from raindrops and dust by means of a flap. When the rear view camera is activated, this flap opens. The flap closes again when: Ryou have finished the maneuvering proc- ess Ryou switch off the engine open the trunk Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 334). For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the rear view camera has been deactivated. Ryou The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immeZ 207 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 208 Activating/deactivating the rear view camera To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in Audio 20/ COMAND; see the Digital Operator's Manual. X Engage reverse gear. The rear view camera flap opens. The area behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in the Audio 20/COMAND display. The image from the rear view camera is available throughout the maneuvering process. Driving and parking X To deactivate: the rear view camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to P or after driving forwards a short distance. Messages in the Audio 20/COMAND display : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic) The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera does not show objects in the following positions: Rvery close to the rear bumper the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the tailgate handle Runder ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline. A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) C Bumper D Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. Driving systems 209 imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle ? Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 208). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X With the help of white guide line :, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space. X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully back up until you reach the end position. Red guide line ? is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. X : Front warning display ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement operational readiness indicator = Rear warning display Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: when PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 200), additional measurement operational readiness indicator ; appears in the Audio 20/ COMAND display. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays : and = are also active or light up correspondingly in the Audio 20/COMAND display. Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle "Reverse parking" function Backing up straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel : Parking space marking ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill. X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 208). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parkX : White guide line without turning the steer- ing wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Z Driving and parking = Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- Driving systems 210 Driving and parking ing space until yellow guide line ; reaches parking space marking :. X Keep the steering wheel in that position and back up carefully. : Red guide line at a distance of approx- : Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible. : White guide line at current steering wheel angle ; Parking space marking X Turn the steering wheel to the center position while the vehicle is stationary. imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel = End of parking space X Back up carefully until you have reached the final position. Red guide line : is then at end of parking space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. Wide-angle function : Symbol for the wide-angle view function ; Own vehicle = PARKTRONIC warning displays You can also use the rear view camera to select a wide-angle view. When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 200), a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the Audio 20/COMAND display. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warning displays = light up in the Audio 20/ Driving systems Object detection The rear view camera helps detect moving and stationary objects. If an object (person, vehicle or other obstacle) is detected, this object is marked with a bar. Objects located some distance from the vehicle away are marked with a yellow bar. If the distance to the object is very small, the bar is displayed in red. Object detection only works in full screen mode. To ensure that you can use the function, it must be switched on in Audio 20/COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. 360° camera (surround view) General notes The 360° camera is a system consisting of four cameras. The system analyzes images from the following cameras: RRear view camera RFront camera RTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mirrors The cameras capture the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The system supports you, for example when parking or if vision is restricted at an exit. You can show pictures from the 360° camera in full-screen mode or in six different splitscreen views on the COMAND/Audio 20 display. A split-screen view also includes a top view of the vehicle. This view is calculated from the data supplied by the installed cameras (virtual camera). The six split-screen views are: Rtop view and picture from the rear view camera (130° viewing angle) Rtop view and image from the front camera (130° viewing angle without displaying the maximum steering wheel angle) Rtop view and enlarged rear view Rtop view and enlarged front view Rtop view and pictures from the rearward facing mirror cameras (rear wheel view) Rtop view and pictures from the forward facing mirror cameras (front wheel view) When the function is active and you shift the transmission from D or R to N, the guide lines in the COMAND display are hidden. When you change between transmission positions D and R, you see the previously selected front or rear view. Important safety notes The 360°camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. You are always responsible for safety, and must always pay attention to your surroundings when parking and maneuvering. This applies to the areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. The 360° camera will not function or will function in a limited manner: Rif the doors are open the exterior mirrors are folded in Rif the trunk lid is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright light Rif Z Driving and parking COMAND display in yellow or red respectively. 211 212 Driving systems Driving and parking Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapid change in temperature Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered Rif the vehicle components in which the cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You can otherwise injure others or cause damage to objects or the vehicle. Guide lines are always shown at road level. The camera in the rear area is protected by means of a flap. This flap opens when the 360° camera is activated. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 335). For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the 360° camera has been deactivated. Activation conditions The 360° camera image can be displayed if: Activating the 360° camera using the function button X Press button :. Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown: Rfull screen display with the image from the front camera Rfull screen display with the image from the rear view camera i You can also switch to the split-screen view from the full-screen view. RCOMAND/Audio 20 is switched on, see the Activating the 360° camera with COMAND Rthe X Digital Operator's Manual 360° Camera function is switched on i If the 360° camera is activated at speeds above 19 mph (30 km/h) a warning message appears. The warning message disappears if: Rthe vehicle's speed falls below 19 mph (30 km/h). The 360° camera is then activated. Rthe message is confirmed with the % button. To select 360° Camera in the carousel menu: turn and press the controller. Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown: Ra split screen with top view and the image from the front camera or Ra split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera Activating the 360° camera using reverse gear The 360° camera images can be automatically displayed by engaging reverse gear. Driving systems Selecting the split-screen and full screen displays ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom-most guideline. Rthe Top view with picture from the rear view camera Switching between split screen views: To switch to the line with the vehicle icons: slide Z V the controller. X To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller. X Switching to full screen mode: X 180° View Turn and press the controller. i The full screen option is only available in the following views: RTop view with picture from the rear view camera RTop view with picture from the front camera Displays in the COMAND display Important safety notes The camera system may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the system in the following locations: : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- ; = ? A imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image Guide line for the maximum steering angle Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Runder the front and rear bumpers close to the front and rear bumpers Rin close range above the handle on the trunk lid Rvery close to the exterior mirrors Rin the transitional areas between the various cameras in the virtual top view Rvery Z Driving and parking Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in COMAND, see the Digital Operator's Manual. X To show the 360° camera image: engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown in the COMAND display in split-screen mode. You see the top view of the vehicle and the image from the rear view camera. X 213 214 Driving systems Driving and parking A Red guide line at a distance of approx- imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle B Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the vehicle Top view and enlarged rear view B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle D Bumper E Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. Top view with picture from the front camera : Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image enlarged ; Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle This view assists you in estimating the distance to the vehicle behind you. i This setting can also be selected as an enlarged front view. : Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and front camera image ; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the vehicle = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Driving systems PARKTRONIC appears: Rin split screen view as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle icon in the top view, or Rin the full screen view, on the right-hand side at the bottom as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle icon i The full screen display can also be selected as front view. : Symbol for the top view and forward- facing mirror camera setting ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (right side of vehicle) = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (left side of vehicle) i You can also select the mirror camera setting for the rear-facing view. Wide-angle function Select this view when you are driving out of an exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted, for example. i To select split-screen view, select the % symbol in the display then confirm with the COMAND controller. Object detection The 360° camera helps detect moving and stationary objects. If an object (person, vehicle, other obstacle) is detected, this object is marked with a bar. Objects located some distance from the vehicle away are marked with a yellow bar. If the distance to the object is very small, the bar is displayed in red. Object detection only functions in both full screen modes. To ensure that you can use the function, it must be switched on in COMAND (see the separate operating instructions). Exiting 360° camera display mode : Symbol for the full screen setting with rear view camera image ; Own vehicle = PARKTRONIC warning displays If the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONIC and the function is active (Y page 201), warning displays = in the COMAND display are also active or light up accordingly. As soon as the vehicle exceeds a speed of 19 mph (30 km/h), the function switches off. The view which was active before the 360° camera was displayed appears in the COMAND display. You can also stop the 360° camera display from split-screen view by selecting the % symbol in the display and then confirming with the COMAND controller. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the 360° camera display is also ended if you select transmission position P. Z Driving and parking Top view with picture from the mirror camera 215 216 Driving systems ATTENTION ASSIST Driving and parking General notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph (200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue your journey and starts assessing your tiredness again if: Ryou switch off the engine. take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break. Ryou Displaying the attention level Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It might not always recognize fatigue or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the length of the journey is less than approximately 30 minutes Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph (200 km/h) Rif you are driving with the active Steer Assist of DISTRONIC PLUS Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed You can have current status information displayed in the assistance menu (Y page 244) of the on-board computer. X Select the Assistance display for Attention Assist using the on-board computer (Y page 243). The following information is displayed: Rlength of the journey since the last break. attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST (Attention Attention Level), Level displayed in a bar display in five levels from high to low. RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot output a warning, the System Suspended message appears. The bar display then changes the display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph (200 km/h). Rthe Driving systems X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 246). The system determines the attention level of the driver depending on the setting selected: Selection Standard Standard: the sensitivity with which the system determines the attention level is set to normal. Selection Sensitive Sensitive: the sensitivity is set higher. The attention level detected by Attention Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned earlier. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, it is automatically reactivated after the engine has been stopped. The sensitivity selected corresponds to the last selection activated (standard/sensitive). Warning in the multifunction display If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, a warning appears in the multifunction display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take a Break!. Break! In addition to the message shown in the multifunction display, you will then hear a warning tone. X If necessary, take a break. X Confirm the message by pressing the a button on the steering wheel. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detects increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. If a warning is output in the multifunction display, a service station search is performed in COMAND. You can select a service station and navigation to this service station will then begin. This function can be activated and deactivated in COMAND. Lane Tracking package General notes The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 217) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 219). Blind Spot Assist General notes Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible warning. Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Important safety notes G WARNING Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles. Z Driving and parking Activating ATTENTION ASSIST 217 218 Driving systems Driving and parking i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Radar sensors The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly. Monitoring area In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, snow or spray Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicycles road has very wide lanes Rthe road has narrow lanes Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Rthe Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles driving at the inner edge of their lanes. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an extended period next to long vehicles, such as trucks. The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the sides of the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. The sensors must not be covered, for example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work properly. Warning display Switching on Blind Spot Assist X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist (Y page 246) is activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red until the engine is started. Display in the assistance graphic : Warning display Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). If you select the reverse gear, Blind Spot Assist is not operational. The brightness of the warning lamps is automatically adapted to the brightness of the surroundings. Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. When Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display in the multifunction display. Above a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar waves in the assistance display changes to green ;. Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use. Lane Keeping Assist General notes Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle with camera :, which is mounted at the top of the windshield. Active Z 219 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving and parking 220 Driving systems Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. This function is available in the range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Important safety notes G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly recognize lane markings. In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and stay in lane, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist. Rnot G WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. You should always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehicle in the lane. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road Switching on Lane Keeping Assist X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. The Lane Keeping Assist On message appears in the multifunction display. If all conditions have been satisfied, there may be a warning. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphics display Driving systems (Y page 243) are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. X To switch off: press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. The Lane Keeping Assist Off message appears in the multifunction display. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting X In the DriveAssist menu on the on-board computer, select the Lane Keeping Assist function (Y page 246). X Select Standard or Adaptive Adaptive. Rthe Adaptive When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. Ryou Ryou road has narrow lanes. cut the corner on a bend. Driving Assistance PLUS package General notes The Active Driving Assistance PLUS package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 185), Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 221) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 224). Active Blind Spot Assist General notes Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle, to monitor the area to the sides of the vehicle which the driver is unable to see. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. Active Blind Spot Assist evaluates the free space in the direction of travel and to the side before making a course-correcting brake application. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors which are pointed in the direction of travel. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Important safety notes Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. Z Driving and parking Standard When Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: 221 222 Driving systems G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Driving and parking Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise no longer work properly. Monitoring area G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Radar sensors The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers and behind a cover in the radiator grill. Make sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. The detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Rpoor Driving systems The brightness of the warning lamps is automatically adapted to the brightness of the surroundings. Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g. trucks, for a prolonged time. Warning display : Warning display Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational. When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display in the multifunction display. Above a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar waves in the assistance display changes to green ;. Active Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use. Visual and acoustic collision warning If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You will then hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Course-correcting brake application If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision. G WARNING A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake appliZ Driving and parking Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the inner edge of your lane. Due to the nature of the system: 223 224 Driving systems Driving and parking cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist X Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 246). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds. Gray radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display in the multifunction display. Active Lane Keeping Assist If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mirror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, display ; underlining the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. A coursecorrecting brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Either no braking application, or a coursecorrecting brake application adapted to the driving situation occurs if: Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle. Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the side. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake. RESP® is switched off. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected. General notes Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of camera system : at the top of the windshield. Various different areas to the front, rear and side of your vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. If you select km in the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function on the on-board computer (Y page 248), Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. Driving systems G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear bumpers or the radiator grill are dirty, e.g. obscured by snow Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and there are broken lane markings detected, no lane-correcting brake application is made. Warning vibration in the steering wheel A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Lane-correcting brake application If you leave your lane, under certain circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle back to the original lane. G WARNING A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you or makes a lane-correcting brake application. Z Driving and parking Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take account of road and weather conditions. It may not recognize traffic situations. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously keep your vehicle in its lane. 225 226 Driving systems Driving and parking Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display : appears in the multifunction display. The brake application also slightly reduces vehicle speed. This function is available in the range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). A lane-correcting brake application can be made after driving over a lane marking recognize as being solid or broken. Before this, a warning must be given by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognized. In the case of a broken lane marking being detected, a lane-correcting brake application can only be made if a vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, overtaking vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes can be detected. high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. RESP® is switched off. Rthe transmission is not in position D. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed. Ran obstacle in the lane in which you are driving has been detected. Active Lane Keeping Assist may not detect other road users or traffic situations. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you: Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction on the turn signal Rclearly brake or accelerate A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if: Rswitch Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Rlane markings can no longer be recognized. Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist i A further lane-correcting brake applica- tion can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane. No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ryou have switched on the turn signal. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. The Lane Keeping Assist On message appears in the multifunction display. If all conditions have been satisfied, a warning or steering intervention may be made. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphics display Driving systems The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe Ryou road has narrow lanes. cut the corner on a bend. Driving and parking (Y page 243) are shown in green. Active Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. X To switch off: press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. The Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. The Lane Keeping Assist Off message appears in the multifunction display. 227 Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting X In the DriveAssist menu on the on-board computer, select the Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist function (Y page 246). X Select Standard or Adaptive Adaptive. When Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. Z 228 Useful information ............................ 230 Important safety notes .................... 230 Displays and operation .................... 230 Menus and submenus ...................... 235 Display messages ............................. 250 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ............................ 284 On-board computer and displays 229 On-board computer and displays 230 Displays and operation Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not operating safely may cause an accident. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (Y page 33). Displays and operation Instrument cluster lighting Important safety notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using brightness control knob :. X Turn brightness control knob : up or down. If the light switch (Y page 126) is set to Ã, T or L, the brightness is dependent upon the brightness of the ambient light. i The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are illuminated. A dimming function is not possible in daylight. Speedometer with segments The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. RCruise control activated (Y page 183): The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 185): One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front: The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. Tachometer ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine. The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. ! A display message is shown if the coolant temperature is too high. If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡ (120 †), do not continue driving. The engine will otherwise be damaged. The analog coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 33). In the on-board computer in the Service menu there is a digital coolant temperature gauge (Y page 244). Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). Operating the on-board computer Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the temperature measured and does not record the road temperature. The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 233). Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Coolant temperature display G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases : Multifunction display ; Right control panel = Left control panel Z 231 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation Displays and operation On-board computer and displays 232 X To activate the on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. % RBack RIn the Radio Radio/Media Media menu: dese- You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Left control panel ò RCalls 9 : Press briefly: lects the track or station list or list of available radio sources/ media RHides display messages RExits the telephone book/redial memory up the main menu in lists a menu or function RIn the Radio Radio/Media Media menu: opens the track or station list and selects an audio track or video scene RIn the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or a telephone number % Press and hold: RRapid scrolling in all lists RIn the Radio Radio/Media Media menu: selects a station, audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Telephone menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open a all menus: confirms the selected entry in the list RIn the Radio Radio/Media Media menu: opens the list of available radio sources/media RIn the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and starts dialing the selected number ñ Switches off the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions RIn Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu RScrolls RSelects 9 : Press briefly: Right control panel ~ RRejects RExits ory 6 or ends a call phone book/redial mem- RMakes or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches W X RAdjusts 8 RMute ó Switches on the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions the volume Multifunction display è ë a ECO start/stop function (Y page 161) HOLD function (Y page 196) DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot (Y page 194) Head-up display General notes Multifunction display : Drive program (Y page 166) ; Transmission position (Y page 166) = Display panel for display messages, menus and menu lists ? Time A Outside temperature (Y page 231) B Additional speedometer (Y page 248) The unit displayed in additional speedometer B in the multifunction display is inverse to the speedometer unit in the instrument cluster. X To call up the menu list in display panel =: press the ò button on the steering wheel. Display panel = shows the selected menu or submenu and display messages. The following messages may appear in the multifunction display: Z Gearshift recommendation, when shifting manually (automatic transmission) (Y page 169) XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 202) CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 183) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 127) The head-up display projects information from the navigation system and the driver assistance system above the dashboard into the driver's field of vision. A requirement for the display of the contents is that the following functions are available in the vehicle and are switched on: RNavigation RDISTRONIC PLUS control The head-up display allows the driver to see all of the information without having to take his eyes off the road. RCruise Important safety notes The head-up display is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. The visibility of the head-up display is influenced by the following conditions: Rthe driver's seat position positioning of the display image Rthe general ambient light Rsunglasses with polarization filters Rwet roads Rblocking of sunlight by objects on the display cover In the event of extreme sunlight, sections of the display may fade. This can be reversed by switching the head-up display off and on again. Rthe i Vehicles with the head-up display are equipped with a special windshield. Should Z 233 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation Displays and operation On-board computer and displays 234 repairs be necessary, have the windshield replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Displays and operation Switching the head-up display on or off X Press button :. When the head-up display is switched on, the display appears in the driver's field of vision. Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays Head-up display Content and information for the following systems are shown in the head-up display: : Navigation messages ; Current speed = Set DISTRONIC PLUS speed (Y page 185) The selected cruise control speed (Y page 183) In the Settings menu, in the submenu head-up display, you have the following settings options: RSwitching other displays on/off (Y page 246) the position (Y page 247) RSetting the brightness (Y page 247) RSetting Menus and submenus Menu overview Press the ò button on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus and select a menu. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 231). Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you can call up the following menus: 235 RAssistance Graphic menu (Y page 243) RService menu (Y page 244) RSettings menu (Y page 244) RTrip menu (Y page 236) menu (navigation instructions) (Y page 238) RRadio menu (Y page 240) RMedia menu (Y page 240) RTelephone menu (Y page 242) RNavi Z Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 236 Trip menu Standard display refueled C instead of approximate range :. Recuperation display = shows you if energy is being recuperated from the kinetic energy in overrun mode and saved in the battery. Recuperation display = depends on the engine installed and is therefore not available in all vehicles. ECO display X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip odometer : and odometer ; is shown. Displaying the range and current fuel consumption Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use the : or 9 button to select ECO DISPLAY. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select approximate range : and current fuel consumption ;. X Approximate range : that can be covered is calculated according to your current driving style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehicle being If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset. For further information on the ECO display, see (Y page 179). Trip computer "From Start" or "From Reset" : ; = ? Distance Duration Average speed Average fuel consumption Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select From Start or From Reset. Reset X The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey whilst the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 237). The From Start trip computer is automatically reset if: Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 miles have been exceeded. The From Reset trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles. Digital speedometer Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the digital speedometer. X Resetting values Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press the a button. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. X Z 237 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 238 Menus and submenus You can reset the values of the following functions: RTrip odometer R"From Start" trip computer R"From Reset" trip computer RECO display When you reset the values in the "ECO display", the values in the trip computer "From Start" are likewise reset. When you reset the values in the trip computer "From Start", the values in the "ECO display" are likewise reset. Navigation system menu Displaying navigation instructions In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. Further information on navigation can be found in the separate Audio 20 or COMAND operating instructions. X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. Route guidance not active Route guidance active No change of direction announced : ; = ? Distance to the next destination Estimated arrival time Distance to the next change of direction Current road Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation : Road into which the change of direction leads ; Distance to the change of direction = Change-of-direction symbol ? Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction (white) A Possible lane (light gray) B Lane not recommended (dark gray) : Direction of travel ; Current road On multilane roads, new lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Lane not recommended B: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Possible lane A: you will be able to complete the next change of direction in this lane only. Recommended lane ?: in this lane you will be able to complete the next change of direction and the one after that. Change of direction with lane recommendation Change of direction without lane recommendation : Road into which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction symbol ? Lane recommendation : Road into which the change of direction Other status indicators of the navigation system leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is to be made, you will see symbol = for the change of direction and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. The change of direction starts once the distance display reaches zero. : Additional information Other possible additional information: RNew Route... or Calculating Route... A new route is calculated. ROff Mapped Road The vehicle position is inside the area of the digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g. non-paved roads (off-road). RNo Route No route could be calculated to the selected destination. RO Z 239 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 240 Menus and submenus You have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. Radio menu Use : or 9 to select the waveband or station memory. X Press a to confirm the selection. X i You can store your stations in Audio 20 or COMAND, see the separate operating instructions. i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normal radio. Further information on navigation can be found in the "Satellite radio" section in the separate Audio 20 or COMAND operating instructions. : ; = ? Waveband Station frequency with memory position Name of artist Name of track Station ; is displayed with the station frequency or station name. The memory position is only displayed along with station ; if this has been stored. X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Radio menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. Currently selected station ; appears in the multifunction display. X To open the station list: press : or 9 briefly. X To select a station from the station list: press : or 9 briefly. X To select a station from the station list using rapid scrolling: press and briefly hold the : or 9 button. X To select a waveband or station memory: press a briefly. Media menu Changing the media source You can change the media source and playback mode (audio, video or TV) at any time in the Media menu. X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Media menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X To open/close the media sources list: press a briefly. The list shows the following media sources, for example: RDisc (CD/DVD) RMemory card (SD/SDHC) RMEDIA REGISTER storage device RBluetooth® audio device RUSB Observe the additional information on media support and on media mode in the separate Audio 20 or COMAND operating instructions. Operating an audio player or audio media To open the track list: press : or 9 briefly. X To select next/previous track from the track list: briefly press : or 9. X To select a track from the track list using rapid scrolling: press and hold : or 9 until the desired track is reached. If you press and hold the : or 9 button, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio drives or data carriers support this function. X If the corresponding track information is stored on the audio drive or audio media, the multifunction display may display the following: Rtrack Rtrack number name Rartist : Media source, e.g. name of USB memory ; = ? A stick Current title Name of artist Name of album Folder name Ralbum The track information does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected). Video DVD operation Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle. Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Media menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X To select audio player or data carrier: press a briefly, to open the list of media sources. X Use : or 9 to select the corresponding audio player or audio media. X Press a to confirm. X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Media menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Z 241 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 242 To select DVD single drive or data carrier: press a briefly, to open the list of media sources. X Use : or 9 to select the corresponding DVD player or DVD media. X Press a to confirm. X To open the scene list: press : or 9 briefly. X To select the next or previous scene from the scene list: briefly press : or 9. X To select a scene from the scene list using rapid scrolling: press and hold : or 9 until desired scene : is reached. X Press a to confirm your selection. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RPhone READY or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RPhone No Service: Service there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network. Accepting a call Telephone menu Introduction G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. X Switch on the mobile phone; see the separate operating instructions. X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to Audio 20 or COMAND, see the separate operating instructions. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. If someone calls you when you are in the Telephone menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. If you are not in the Telephone menu, you can still accept a call. Rejecting or ending a call X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel. If you are not in the Telephone menu, you can still reject or end a call. Dialing a number from the phone book Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the :, 9 or a button to switch to the phone book. X Press the : or 9 button to select the desired name. or X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold the : or 9 button for longer than one second. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the : or 9 button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X To exit the phone book: press the ~ or % button. X Redialing The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory. Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the : or 9 button to select the desired name or number. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ or % button. X Assistance graphic menu Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Assistance Graphic menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. The multifunction display shows the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the assistance graphic. X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST assessment. X The assistance graphic displays the status of and information from the following driving systems or driving safety systems: RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 191) RDistance warning and the autonomous braking function COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 245) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 74) RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 217) or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 221) Z 243 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 244 Menus and submenus RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 216) RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 219) or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 224) Maintenance menu Introduction Use : or 9 to select the Coolant submenu. X Press a to confirm your selection. The coolant temperature is shown in a bar display. X Settings menu Introduction In the Service menu, you have the following options: RCalling up display messages in message memory (Y page 250) RChecking the tire pressure electronically (Y page 367) RCalling up the service due date (Y page 329) RDisplaying the coolant temperature (Y page 244) Displaying the coolant temperature The coolant temperature is also shown in the instrument cluster in the tachometer. Observe the notes on coolant temperature (Y page 231). X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. In the Settings menu, you have the following options: RChanging assistance settings (Y page 244) RChanging head-up display settings (Y page 246) RChanging the light settings (Y page 247) RChanging the instrument cluster settings (Y page 248) RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 249) Assistance submenu Deactivating/activating ESP® Observe the "Important safety notes" section in the description of ESP (Y page 72). G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains deep snow Ron sand or gravel For further information about ESP®, see (Y page 71). X Start the engine. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐ sist submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select ESP. ESP X Press a to confirm. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. If the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the vehicle is ready to drive, ESP® is deactivated. Rin If the ÷ and å warning lamps light up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 288). Observe the information on display messages (Y page 251). Activating/deactivating COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. Use : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐ sist submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Use 9 or : to select Collision Prevention. Prevention X Press a to confirm. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display in the Assistance Graphic menu. X For further information about COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 69). Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Drive Assist submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select PRE-SAFE Brake. Brake X Press a to confirm. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the Assistance Graphic menu in the multifunction display. X For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake, see (Y page 74). Z 245 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 246 Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Drive Assist submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select Blind Spot Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the Assistance Graphic menu in the multifunction display. X For further information about Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 217). For further information about Active Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 221). Setting ATTENTION ASSIST X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Drive Assist submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select Attention Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. Press the : or 9 button to set Off Off, Standard or Sensitive Sensitive. X Press the a button to confirm the selection. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the Assis‐ tance Info Display menu in the multifunction display when the ignition is on. X For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 216). Setting Lane Keeping Assist Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Drive Assist submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select Lane Keep‐ ing Assist. Assist X Press a to confirm. The current selection Standard or Adap‐ tive is displayed. X To change the setting: press a again. X For further information about Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 219). For further information about Active Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 224). Head-up display submenu Switching other displays on/off This function is only available if the vehicle is equipped with Navigation and/or Traffic Sign Assist. In the on-board computer, you can select which contents are shown on the windshield when the head-up display is activated (Y page 233). Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Head-up Display submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 buttons to select Display Content. Content X Press a to confirm. X Switching the navigation messages display on/off X Press the a button to save the setting. When you switch on the Navigation Mes‐ sages display, navigation messages are shown on the windshield when the head-up display is activated. For more information on navigation, see the separate operating instructions. Setting the position You can adjust the position of the displayed contents on the windshield. X Switch on the Head-up display (Y page 234). X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use the : or 9 button to select the Head-up Display submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Use the : or 9 button to select the Position function. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Use the : or 9 button to set the position from Level +5 to Level -5. -5 X Press the a or % button to save the setting. Using the Memory function, you can save and call up the position of the Head-up display as a single memory preset (Y page 120). Setting the brightness You can adjust the brightness of the displayed contents on the windshield. X Switch on the Head-up display (Y page 234). X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use the : or 9 button to select the Head-up Display submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Brightness function. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the : or 9 button to set the brightness from Level +5 (bright) to Level -5 (dark). X Press the a or % button to save the setting. Light submenu Switching the daytime running lamps on/ off This function is not available in Canada. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. X Press a to confirm. Z 247 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays 248 Press the : or 9 button to select the Daytime Running Lights function. If the Daytime Running Lights function has been switched on, the cone of light and the W symbol in the multifunction display are shown in white. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Further information on daytime running lamps (Y page 124). Instrument cluster submenu Selecting the unit of measurement for distance The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunction display. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function. You will see the selected setting: km or miles. miles X Press the a button to save the setting. The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: RDigital speedometer in the Trip menu and the trip odometer RTrip computer RCurrent consumption and the range RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu RCruise control RDISTRONIC PLUS RASSYST PLUS service interval display ROdometer Selecting the permanent display function Using the Permanent Display: function you can enable outside temperature and additional speedometer displays in the status area of the multifunction display. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Perma‐ nent Display function. X Press a to confirm. The current selection Outside Tempera‐ ture or Speedometer is displayed. X To change the setting: press a again. Switching the additional speedometer on/off Use the Additional Speedometer function to choose whether the status area in the multifunction display shows the speed digitally. The unit in the additional speedometer is always inverse to the speedometer unit. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Use : or 9 to select the Addi‐ tional Speedometer function. The current selection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays Restoring the factory settings 249 Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory Settings submenu. X Press a to confirm. The Reset All Settings? message appears. X Press the : or 9 button to select No or Yes Yes. X Press a to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. X For safety reasons, the Daytime Running Lights function in the Lights submenu is only reset if the vehicle is stationary. Z Display messages On-board computer and displays 250 Display messages Introduction General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone. You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 196) page 174) RParking (Y Hiding display messages X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message. The display message is cleared. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press : or 9 to select the message memory. If there are no display messages, you will see No Messages in the multifunction display. If there are display messages, the number of messages stored is shown. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to scroll through the display messages. X X Safety systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, Crosswind Assist, hill start assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are temporarily unavailable. BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient. Currently Unavail‐ able See Opera‐ tor's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X !÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, Crosswind Assist, hill start assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. The $ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷ å and ! warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING Z 251 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 252 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, Crosswind Assist, hill start assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Inoperative See Operator's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, Crosswind Assist, hill start assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Currently Unavail‐ able See Opera‐ tor's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 253 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 254 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions T! ÷ EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, HOLD function, Crosswind Assist, hill start assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. Inoperative See Operator's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. F(USA only)!(Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake F(USA only)!(Canada only) Parking Brake See Operator's Manual The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 176). You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. X Release the electric parking brake manually. The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are making an emergency stop using the electric parking brake (Y page 176). The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: Switch the ignition off. Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds. X Shift the transmission to P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. or X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 176). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X X Do not drive on. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Apply the electric parking brake manually. If the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: Do not drive on. Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 382). X Shift the transmission to P. X Turn the front wheels towards the curb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X Z 255 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 256 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake. If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake: X X Shift the transmission to P. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually: X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 176). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to P as the electric parking brake is not being applied automatically. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually: X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 176). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions F(USA only)!(Canada The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. only) Parking Brake Inop‐ The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage. erative X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine. X Engage or release the electric parking brake. If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Engage or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. F(USA only)!(Canada only) Turn On the Igni‐ tion to Release the Parking Brake The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up. You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off. X Switch on the ignition. Z 257 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 258 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $(USA only)J(Canada There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. only) Check Brake Fluid Level G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction. # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. USA only: the red $ brake system warning lamp also lights up while the engine is running. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning. X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Collision Preven‐ tion Assist Plus Currently Unavail‐ able See Opera‐ tor's Manual COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not operational. Possible causes are: Check Brake Pad Wear Inoperative Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Restart the engine. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Collision Preven‐ tion Assist Plus Inoperative COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative due to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. PRE-SAFE Inopera‐ tive See Opera‐ tor's Manual Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. PRE-SAFE Functions PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Currently Limited Possible causes are: See Operator's Man‐ R function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. ual Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake are operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Restart the engine. X PRE-SAFE Functions Limited See Opera‐ tor's Manual PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 259 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 260 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Radar Sensors Dirty See Opera‐ tor's Manual At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety systems is temporarily restricted or inoperative: RPRE-SAFE® PLUS Brake RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS RActive Lane Keeping Assist RActive Blind Spot Assist RDISTRONIC PLUS Possible causes are: RPRE-SAFE® Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty. Rthe function of the driving system and/or driving safety system is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. All driving systems/driving safety systems are operative again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Switch off the engine. X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 334): Rin the radiator trim Rin the front bumper Rin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear bumper X Restart the engine. The display message disappears. X 6 SRS Malfunction Service Required The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 42). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 The front left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunctioned. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument Front Left Malfunc‐ cluster. tion Service G WARNING Required or Front Right Malfunction The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trigService Required gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 Rear Left Malfunc‐ tion Service Required or Rear Right Malfunction Service Required 6 Rear Center Mal‐ function Service Required 6 Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required or Right Side Cur‐ tain Airbag Mal‐ function Service Required The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunctioned. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The rear center restraint system has malfunctioned. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 261 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 262 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, even Front Passenger though: Airbag Disabled See Operator's Man‐ Ran adult ual or Ra person larger than a certain size is occupying the frontpassenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is. G WARNING The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. Rafter this, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 52). Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multifunction display. X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamps remain lit or go out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 52). Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even though: Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat. G WARNING The air bag may deploy unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat. X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. Rafter this, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 52). Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Z 263 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 264 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Disabled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multifunction display. X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamps remain lit or go out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 52). Lights i Display messages about LEDs: This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Left Corner‐ ing Light or Check Right Cornering Light b Check Left Low Beam or Check Right Low Beam b Check Rear Left Turn Signal or Check Rear Right Turn Signal The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 130). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 130). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Display messages b Check Front Left Turn Signal or Check Front Right Turn Signal Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective. Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 130). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand high beam is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 130). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Left Mirror Turn Signal or Check Right Mirror Turn Signal Check Left Brake Lamp or Check Right Brake Lamp Check Center Brake Lamp Check Left Tail and Brake Lamps or Check Right Tail and Brake Lamps Check Left Tail Lamp or Check Right Tail Lamp Check Left High Beam or Check Right High Beam License Plate Lamp Z 265 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 266 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 130). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right front side marker lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Front Left Parking Lamp or Check Front Right Parking Lamp Backup Light Check Front Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Front Right Sidemarker Lamp b Check Rear Sidemarker Check Rear Sidemarker Left Lamp or Right Lamp b Check Left Daytime Running Light or Check Right Day‐ time Running Light b Active Headlamps Inoperative b Malfunction See Operator’s Manual b Auto Lamp Function Inoperative The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The active light function is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The exterior lighting is defective. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The light sensor is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to Ã. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Switch Off Lights Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, display message Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. Check Coolant Level See Opera‐ tor's Manual ? ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 327). X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X The fan motor is faulty. X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. Z 267 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 268 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off G WARNING Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). # The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. See Operator's Man‐ Possible causes are: ual Ra defective alternator Ra torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's Manual display message. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # The engine is off and the battery charge level is too low. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster and interior lighting. X Leave the engine running for a few minutes or drive a long distance. The battery is being charged. 4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 325). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 326). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine oil needs to be added more often than usual. Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual Start Engine See Operator's Manual Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Z 269 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 270 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 4 Display message only for AMG vehicles: The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart) X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 325). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 326). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine oil needs to be added more often than usual. ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. 4 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Check the engine oil level (Y page 325). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 326). 8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station. Fuel Level Low C 8 Gas Cap Loose X There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail. X The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: X Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Driving systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. À Attention Assist Inoperative ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X ¨ Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected. ¨ The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning tone also sounds. X Do not pull away. The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears. ¨ You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low. AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Vehicle Rising Vehicle Rising Please Wait Stop Vehicle Vehi‐ cle Too Low AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds. Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h). X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement is too large. X Listen for scraping sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and select a higher vehicle level. Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehicle. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Z 271 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 272 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ¨ The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual or Active Lane Keeping Assist Cur‐ rently Unavailable See Operator's Man‐ ual Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Malfunction Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period. Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rvisibility Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Clean the windshield. X Lane Keeping Assist Inopera‐ tive or Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavail‐ able See Opera‐ tor's Manual or Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Restart the engine. X Blind Spot Assist Inoperative or Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Park Assist Can‐ celed The driver's door is open. X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with the driver's door closed. You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally. The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 202). Park Assist Inoper‐ PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty. ative X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with PARKTRONIC" section (Y page 202). If the display message continues to be displayed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 273 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 274 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty. X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine. If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (the j symbol is not shown in the multifunction display): X ë Off Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 196). The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 196). DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 185). If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS Now Available DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 185). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐ rently Unavailable See Operator's Man‐ ual DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are also temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: Rthe Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Restart the engine. X DISTRONIC PLUS Inoperative DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. The following may have also failed: RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist Brake RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. RPRE-SAFE® DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. pended X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS - - - mph An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 185). X Z 275 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 276 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DTR+: Steering Assist. Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period. Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again. If the display message does not disappear: Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Clean the windshield. X DTR+: Steering Assist. Inopera‐ tive DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are malfunctioning. However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise Control Inoperative Cruise control is defective. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise Control - - - mph A condition for activating cruise control has not been met. You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 183). Tires Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Tire Pres‐ sure Soon Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or instal- led new wheels and tires. Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires is not correct. G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 341). X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct (Y page 369). Check Tire Pres‐ sure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 369). Run Flat Indicator Inoperative Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 277 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 278 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Please Correct Tire Pressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 365). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 367). Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 341). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 365). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Warning Tire Mal‐ function The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Ryou could lose control of the vehicle. Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat buildup and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 341). Tire Press. Moni‐ tor Currently Unavailable Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been solved. Tire Press. Sen‐ sor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Tire Pressure Mon‐ itor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Tire Press. Moni‐ tor Inoperative The tire pressure monitor is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Z 279 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 280 Display messages Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in Shift to 'P' or 'N' to Start Engine position R or D. X Shift the transmission to position P or N. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. X Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehi‐ cle Rolling Away Depress the brake pedal. The driver's door is open and the transmission is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Stationary N Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. The vehicle is moving. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. The trunk lid is open. Close the trunk lid. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Close the hood. C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all the doors. _ The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or right-hand side. X Push the backrest back until it engages. Rear Left Backrest Not Latched or Rear Right Back‐ rest Not Latched _ Rear Center Back‐ rest Not Engaged Ð The center rear seat backrest is not engaged. Push the backrest back until it engages. X The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. Power Steering Mal‐ G WARNING function See Oper‐ ator's Manual You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Z 281 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 282 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ð The electric steering lock is malfunctioning. Steering Malfunc‐ tion See Opera‐ tor's Manual _ Before Starting the Engine, Turn Steering Wheel G WARNING The steering may be locked by the electric steering lock. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Do not drive on and consult the nearest qualified specialist workshop. The electric steering lock was unable to unlock the steering. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly. X Insert the key into the ignition lock again. Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Add washer fluid (Y page 327). Check Washer Fluid SmartKey Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Use the correct SmartKey.  The SmartKey is in the ignition lock. X Remove the SmartKey.  The SmartKey needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle Take Your Key from Ignition Obtain a New Key Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  The SmartKey batteries are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 84).  Don't Forget Your Key The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 seconds and is simply a reminder. X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.  The SmartKey is currently undetected. X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. Replace Key Battery Key Not Detected (white display message)  Key Not Detected (red display message) If the SmartKey still cannot be detected: X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. The SmartKey is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Locate the SmartKey. X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message. Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.  The SmartKey is continually undetected. The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or Remove 'Start' But‐ is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. ton and Insert Key X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 283 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 284 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Safety Seat belts Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds. The driver's seat belt is not fastened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). The warning tone ceases. ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). The warning lamp goes out. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 46). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Safety systems Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. $J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. $ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The multifunction display also shows a display message with the # symbol. The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 285 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 286 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction. Therefore BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), Crosswind Assist, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also deactivated. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP®, Crosswind Assist, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also unavailable. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 287 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 288 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $J ÷å ! N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp, the yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning lamp and the yellow ABS warning lamp are lit while the engine is running. ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore BAS, BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, EBD®, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are also unavailable. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 72), it may be best to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 72). Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, HOLD function, hill start assist, Crosswind Assist, STEER CONTROL, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the ECO start/stop function is activated. ESP® is deactivated. G WARNING If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Reactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 72), it may be best to deactivate ESP®. Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 72). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 289 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 290 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions F! N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake is lit. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. 6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is faulty. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 42). Engine Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. There may be a malfunction, for example: Rin the engine management the fuel injection system Rin the exhaust system Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines) Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Rin In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving. 8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station. 8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up. The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap. X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop. ? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gage is at the start of the bar display. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defective. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 291 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 292 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 327). X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. ? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 327). X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. X Driving systems Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning tone also sounds. You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. Further information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 74). For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 69). Z 293 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 294 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Tires Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires. G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 341). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 365). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Rthey h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is faulty. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ð N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Z 295 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 296 297 Useful information ............................ 298 Stowage areas .................................. 298 Stowage and features Features ............................................. 306 298 Stowage areas Useful information Stowage and features i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). Stowage areas Loading guidelines G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: RNever exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the gross axle weight rating of the vehicle (including occupants). The values are specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door. RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the trunk as possible. RThe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. RAlways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for protection. Stowage spaces Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not correctly store objects in the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. RAlways store objects so that they cannot be flung around in these or in similar situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage compartments, parcel nets or stowage nets. Stowage areas lockable stowage compartments while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 298). To lock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position 2. X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise to position 1. X Eyeglasses compartment Stowage compartments in the front Glove box To open: press marking :. The eyeglasses compartment opens downwards. X To close: press marking : again and the eyeglasses compartment returns upwards and engages. X To open: pull handle : and open glove box flap ;. X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until it engages. X Objects in A4 format or an iPad®, for example, can be stored in the glove box. For vehicles with a perfume atomizer (Y page 150) the storage space of the glove box is restricted. The glove box can only be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key. Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion. Stowage compartment in the front center console X Briefly press trim ; in the direction of the arrow. Cover : swings upwards. Z Stowage and features RClose 299 Stowage areas 300 Stowage compartment under the armrest Stowage space in the rear Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. Stowage and features ! Close the cover of the stowage compartment before folding the rear seat armrest back into the seat backrest. X To open: press button : at the front. The stowage space opens. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following may be in the stowage space: Ra multimedia connector unit with 2 USB ports and a SD card slot, e.g. for use with an iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player, see the separate Operator's Manual Ra small stowage space in the upper front section Stowage compartment in the doors X X To open: fold down the seat armrest. Press on the front of release catch : and fold the cover of the armrest upwards. Additional stowage space Depending on the equipment, the following additional stowage areas are available in the vehicle: Rcard You can store items such as a rolled-up fluorescent jacket (driver's door) and the vehicle document wallet (front-passenger door) in stowage compartment : in the doors. In doors ; you can store bottles with a capacity of up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter). and coin holder in the dashboard above the light switch (not suitable for holding thin objects such as shopping tokens) Rthe open stowage compartment in the center console Rstowage net in front-passenger footwell Rthe map pockets on the back of the driver's and front-passenger seat Rthe parcel nets on the left and right-hand side in the trunk Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 298) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 298). Stowage areas Important safety notes X X G WARNING The skibag in conjunction with the lashing straps cannot restrain any objects other than skis. Vehicle occupants could be struck in the event of sudden braking or an accident, for instance, if you: other heavy or sharp-edged objects in the skibag Rdo not secure the skibag with the lashing straps There is a risk of accident and injury. Store only skis in the skibag. Always secure the skibag with the lashing straps so that it cannot move around. Close the ski and snowboard bag. Pull tensioning strap ; tight by the loose end until the skis or snowboards are held firmly inside the ski and snowboard bag. Rtransport A maximum of four pairs of skis or two snowboards can be transported in the ski and snowboard bag. Securing the ski and snowboard bag in the trunk Fold the middle rear seat backrest forwards (Y page 302). X Slide the ski and snowboard bag between the two outside rear seat backrests. Ensure that the wheels of the ski and snowboard bag are in the trunk. X Open the ski and snowboard bag with zipper : and place the skis or snowboards inside it. X X Engage tensioning strap = in a diagonal pattern on hooks ? in cargo tie-down rings A as shown. Rear bench seat through-loading feature Important safety notes G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries. RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. There is an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 298). The outside and the middle rear seat backrests can be folded down separately to Z Stowage and features Ski and snowboard bag 301 Stowage areas 302 increase the trunk capacity. The division ratio is 40% to 20% to 40%. Folding the rear seat backrests forward Vehicles without memory function: if necessary, move the driver's or frontpassenger seat forward. X Vehicles with memory function: when one or both parts of the rear seat backrest are folded forward, the respective front seat moves forward slightly, when necessary, in order to avoid contact. X Open the trunk. X Fully insert the rear seat backrest head restraints. Stowage and features X Fold corresponding rear seat backrest ; forward. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X Folding the rear seat backrest back ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. Left and right seat backrest X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat backrest release handle :. The corresponding rear seat backrest is released. Left and right seat backrest Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it engages. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds. X Middle rear seat backrest X Pull release lever ; forwards. Rear seat backrest : is released. Stowage areas To lock: fold the left and center seat backrests forward. Make sure that the center and left seat backrests are engaged and joined together. X Slide catch : upwards. The release mechanism of the center seat backrest is locked. X To unlock: fold back the left and center rear seat backrests. X Slide catch : downward from inside the trunk. 303 Middle rear seat backrest Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages. Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visible. X Adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 111). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X You should always engage the rear seat backrests if you do not need the throughloading feature. This will prevent unauthorized access to the trunk from the vehicle interior. Locking the center rear seat backrest Securing cargo Cargo tie-down rings General notes Observe the following notes on securing loads: RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 298). RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down rings. RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down rings evenly. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection. In order to prevent the trunk from being accessed by unauthorized persons, the center seat backrest can be locked using a catch. The center seat backrest can only be folded forward together with the left seat backrest. Z Stowage and features X Stowage areas 304 Trunk EASY-PACK trunk box Stowage and features Important safety notes Sedan with through-loading feature in the rear bench seat X Fold up the cargo tie-down rings next to the rear seat backrest and put them through the slots in the carpet. Bag hook G WARNING The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage could be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly changing directions. There is a risk of injury. Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks. ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure a load. : Bag hook G WARNING When the load surface moves up, your hands may become trapped on the frame of the EASY-PACK trunk box. There is a risk of injury. When the load surface moves up, make sure that your hands are not within the sweep of the load surface. If someone becomes trapped, carefully push the center of the load surface downward. ! When the EASY-PACK trunk box is pulled out, no objects may be placed on the frame of the box, nor should the frame be pushed from above. Otherwise, the box could be damaged. ! Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects can damage the EASY-PACK trunk box and then be thrown out. There is a risk of injury. Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects in the EASY-PACK trunk box. Always store and secure these or similar objects in the trunk outside of the EASYPACK trunk box. ! If you exceed the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box, objects can be thrown out of the EASY-PACK trunk box and strike vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always observe the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box. Always store and secure heavy objects in the trunk outside of the EASY-PACK trunk box. The maximum permitted load of the EASYPACK trunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). With a load of above approximately 11 lbs (5 kg), the bottom of the box moves downward until it rests on the mat of the trunk floor. Thus, overloading of the box is avoided. Stowage areas 305 Raise box : and press hooks A into anchorage ? as far as they will go. X Turn left-hand rotating catch B counterclockwise and right-hand rotating catch B clockwise by 90°. X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catch B clockwise and right-hand rotating catch B counter-clockwise by 90°. X Move box : downwards and pull it out from anchorages ?. X Example Pull the box out by handle : in the direction of the arrow all the way to the stop. X Lowering the load surface: push the center of load surface ; down by hand in the direction of the arrow until load surface ; has reached the desired position and the box is the desired size. X To raise the load surface: press switch =. Load surface ; of the box moves up automatically. X To stow the box: push the box in by handle : all the way to the stop. X Removing and installing Store the EASY-PACK trunk box on a flat surface after removal, e.g. on a suitable shelf. Stowage well under the trunk floor ! Unhook the handle before again before closing the trunk lid and clip it in securely to prevent the handle flap from protruding. Otherwise, you could damage the handle. Example X To install: insert retainer ; of box : into slots = The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located in the stowage compartment. X To open: pull handle : up. Z Stowage and features Adjusting the height to any position Features Stowage and features 306 X Hook handle : into rain trough ;. Roof carrier Important safety notes G WARNING An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load may become detached from the vehicle. You must therefore ensure that you observe the roof carrier manufacturer's installation instructions. Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be opened if a roof carrier is installed. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can still be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel makes contact with a roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof will lower slightly but remain raised at the rear. Attaching the roof carrier When you load the roof, the center of gravity of the vehicle rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. The maximum roof load can be found in the "Technical data" (Y page 403). ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to avoid damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof carrier is installed you can: Rraise the sliding sunroof/panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel fully Ropen the trunk lid fully ! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers, do not use metallic or hard objects to open them. Open covers : carefully in the direction of the arrow. X Fold covers : upwards. X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Features Cup holder Important safety notes ! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. Features If you do not correctly store objects in the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. RAlways store objects so that they cannot be flung around in these or in similar situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage compartments, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose lockable stowage compartments while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the trunk. You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only. Cup holder in the rear seat armrest ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. ! Close the cup holder before folding the rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 298). Cup holder in the front-compartment center console Fold down the rear seat armrest. To open: press the front of cup holder : or ;. Cup holder : or ; extends automatically. X To fold out: place a container in the cup holder. The cup holder folds down automatically. X To fold in: remove the container. The cup holder folds in automatically. X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back until it engages. X X If you remove the cup holder insert, you can use the resulting compartment for stowage. X To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 299). X To remove: slide catch = forwards and pull out cup holder ;. X To insert: insert cup holder ; and slide back catch =. X To close: push cover : of the stowage compartment closed. Sun visors Overview G WARNING If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an accident. Z Stowage and features G WARNING 307 Features 308 Stowage and features Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving. X : ; = ? A Mirror light Bracket Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket Vanity mirror Mirror cover Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. Glare from the side Fold down the sun visor. Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. X Swing the sun visor to the side. X X Rear side window roller sunblinds ! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Do not let it snap back suddenly as this would damage the automatic roller mechanism. ! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller sunblind hooked in and the side windows opened simultaneously. The roller sunblind can jump out of the retainers and spring back suddenly when driving at high speeds, e.g. when driving on the freeway. This could damage the inertia reel. Therefore, either close the side window or retract the roller sunblind before driving at high speeds. To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the top of the window. Rear window roller sunblind Important safety notes G WARNING When extending or retracting, parts of the body could become trapped within the sweep of the roller sunblind. There is a risk of injury. When extending or retracting, make sure that no one has any parts of the body within the sweep of the roller sunblind. If someone becomes trapped, briefly press the button again. The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. ! Make sure that the roller sunblind can move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or other objects could be damaged. Extending/retracting the roller sunblind Features Ashtray Front ashtray ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged. Rear-compartment ashtray To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge. To remove the insert: push ribbing = from the left side and pull insert : upwards. X To install the insert: install insert : from above into the holder and press down into the holder until it engages. X X Cigarette lighter G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 299). X Push the cover of the ashtray upwards at its right side =. X To remove the insert: hold the sides of insert ?, push it upwards gently ; and pull it out. X To re-install the insert: press insert ? into the holder until it engages. X To close: close the cover of the ashtray. X Push cover : of the stowage compartment closed. X hot cigarette lighter falls child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Ra Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit. i You can remove the ashtray insert and use the resulting compartment for stowage. Z Stowage and features Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To extend or retract: briefly press button :. The roller sunblind fully extends or fully retracts. X To stop: briefly press button : again. The roller sunblind stops briefly and moves back into the out-of-use position. X 309 Features 310 Stowage and features Socket in the front-compartment center console Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 299). X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X To close: push cover : of the stowage compartment closed. X To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 299). X Lift up the cover of socket ;. X To close: push cover : of the stowage compartment closed. X Socket in the rear-compartment center console 12 V sockets General notes X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as lamps or chargers for mobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. An emergency cut-out ensures that the onboard voltage does not drop too low. If the onboard voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compartment open. This prevents the cover from being blocked. X X Pull cover ; out by its top edge. Lift up the cover of socket :. mbrace General notes The mbrace system is only available in the USA. You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To log in, press the ï MB Info call button. If any of Features Rit has been activated and is operational Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Customer Center Ra service subscription is available Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged Determining the location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if: RGPS reception is available. vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center. Rthe The mbrace system To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as follows: X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Use the COMAND/Audio 20 volume control. System self-test After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis. A malfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following occurs: RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test. RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red after the system self-diagnosis: - SOS button - F Roadside Assistance call button - ï MB Info call button RThe Inoperative or the Service Not Activated message appears in the multifunction display after the system self-diagnosis. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means. Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 The system offers various services, e.g.: RAutomatic and manual emergency call Assistance call RMB Info call You can find information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. RRoadside Z Stowage and features the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 Shortly after successfully registering with the mbrace service, a user ID and password will be sent to you by mail. You can use this password to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. The system is available if: 311 312 Features Emergency call Important safety notes G WARNING It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, even if you have pressed the SOS button in an emergency if: Stowage and features Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident vehicle is on a dangerous section of road Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions There is a risk of an accident and injury. Leave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Move to a safe location along with other vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle. Rthe General notes Observe the notes on system activation (Y page 310). An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself. An emergency call can also be initiated manually. As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. Once the connection has been made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system) Rvehicle identification number Rinformation on the severity of the accident Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the emergency. RIf there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle. If no voice connection can be established to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, the system has been unable to initiate an emergency call. This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display and must be confirmed. In this case, summon assistance by other means. Making an emergency call Features If the mobile phone network is unavailable, mbrace will not be able to make the emergency call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after pressing the SOS button, you will not know whether mbrace placed the emergency call. In this case, always summon assistance by other means. Roadside Assistance button X To call Roadside Assistance: press button : for Roadside Assistance. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button : flashes while the call is active. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐ nected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle identification number The COMAND/Audio 20 display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button in COMAND/Audio 20, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. From the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of the problem (Y page 317). The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified MercedesBenz technician or makes arrangements for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. You can find more information in the separate mbrace manual. The system has not been able to initiate a Roadside Assistance call, if: Rvehicle Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance call button F is flashing continuously. voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding COMAND/Audio 20 button for ending a phone call. Rno Z Stowage and features To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover : briefly to open. X Press SOS button ; briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded. X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. X After the emergency call, close cover :. X 313 Features 314 MB Info call button You can find further information on the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. The system has not been able to initiate an MB Info call, if: Stowage and features Rthe X To call MB Info: press MB Info call button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while the connection is being made. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐ nected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle identification number The COMAND/Audio 20 display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button in COMAND/Audio 20, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. You receive information about operating your vehicle, about the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and about other products and services from Mercedes-Benz. Rvehicle indicator lamp in MB Info call button ï is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding COMAND/Audio 20 button for ending a phone call. Call priority When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls. The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended. An emergency call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. All other calls can be ended by pressing: Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steer- ing wheel corresponding button in COMAND/ Audio 20 to end the voice call When a call is initiated, the audio system is muted. The mobile phone is no longer connected to COMAND/Audio 20. However, if you want to use your mobile phone, do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location. Rthe Downloading destinations Search & Send Downloading destinations Downloading destinations gives you access to a database with over 15 million points of interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navigation system in your vehicle. If you know the destination, the address can be downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the location of Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity. Furthermore, you can download routes with up to four way points. You are prompted to confirm route guidance to the address entered. General notes To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be equipped with mbrace and a navigation system. Additionally, an mbrace service subscription must be completed. "Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A destination address which is found on Google Maps® can be transferred via mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation system. X Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding XVY the controller and confirm with W. The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered. If you select No the address can be stored in the address book. The destination download function is available if: Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation system. Rthe relevant mobile phone network is available and data transfer is possible. Route Assistance This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package and cannot be purchased separately. You can use the route assistance function even if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system. Within the framework of this service, you receive a professional and reliable form of navigation support without having to leave your vehicle. The customer service representative finds a suitable route depending on your vehicle's current position and the desired destination. You will then be guided live through the current route section. Specifying and sending the destination address X Go to the website http:// maps.google.com and enter a destination address into the entry field. X To send the destination address to the e-mail address of your mbrace account: click on the corresponding button on the website. Example: If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will be sent to your vehicle. X When the "Send" dialog window appears: Enter the e-mail address you specified when setting up your mbrace account into the corresponding field. X Click "Send". Information on specific commands such as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the website. Calling up a transmitted destination address X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). The transmitted destination address is loaded into the vehicle's navigation system. Z 315 Stowage and features Features Stowage and features 316 Features A display message appears, asking whether navigation should be started. X Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding XVY the controller and confirm with W. The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered. If you select No the address can be stored in the address book. If you have sent more than one destination address, each individual destination must be confirmed separately. Destination addresses are loaded in the same order as the order in which they were sent. If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with mbrace and activated mbrace accounts: If multiple vehicles are registered under the same e-mail address, the destination will be sent to all the vehicles. Vehicle remote opening You can use the vehicle remote opening if you have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a replacement SmartKey is not available. The vehicle can be opened by the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately opened remotely within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened remotely. The vehicle remote unlocking feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible. X Contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 You will be asked for your password. X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section Rthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone®, Android) To do this, you will need your identification number and password. Vehicle remote closing The vehicle remote-closing feature can be used when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, remote closing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle can no longer be locked remotely. The vehicle remote closing feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible. X Contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 You will be asked for your password. The next time you are inside the vehicle and you switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked Remotely message appears in the multifunction display. Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section Rthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone®, Android) To do this, you will need your identification number and password. Features If your vehicle has been stolen: Notify the police. The police will issue a numbered incident report. X This number will be forwarded to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center together with your PIN. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center then tries to locate the system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center contacts you and the local law enforcement agency if the vehicle is located. However, only the law enforcement agency is informed of the location of the vehicle. X If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center is automatically notified. Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis With the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis, the Customer Assistance Center can provide improved support for problems with your vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Customer Assistance Center. The customer service representative can use the received data to decide what kind of assistance is required. You are then, for example, guided to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicle is called. If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is initiated by the Customer Assistance Center. You will see the following message in the COMAND display: Roadside Assistance Connected. If the remote malfunction diagConnected nosis can be started, the Request for Vehicle Diagnostics Received Start vehicle diagnostics? message appears in the display. Press the Yes button to confirm the message. X When the Vehicle Diagnostics Please Start Ignition message appears: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X If the Please follow the instruc‐ tions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position. message appears: please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position. The message in the display disappears. The vehicle operating state check begins. During this procedure, you will see the Vehicle Diagnostics Active message. If you select Cancel the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis is canceled completely. X When the check is complete, the Sending vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice connection may be interrupted dur‐ ing data transfer) message appears. The vehicle data can now be sent. X Press the OK button to confirm the message. The voice connection with the Customer Assistance Center is terminated. The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ ring Data... message appears. The vehicle data is sent to the Customer Assistance Center. Depending on what the customer service representative agreed with you, the voice connection is re-established after the transfer is complete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a later time by another means, e.g. by email or phone. Another function of the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis is the transfer of service data to the Customer Assistance Center. If a service is overdue, the COMAND display shows a message about various special offers at your workshop. Z Stowage and features Stolen vehicle recovery service 317 318 Features This information can also be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Information on the data stored in the vehicle (Y page 28). Information on Roadside Assistance (Y page 24). Stowage and features Downloading routes Downloading routes allows you to transfer and save predefined routes in the navigation system. A route can be prepared and sent by either a customer service representative or under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Each route can include up to four way points. Once a route has been received by the navigation system, you will see the The "Route name" external route has been saved to "Previous Destinations". Would you like to start navigation? message. The route is saved to the hard disk. X To start route guidance: select Yes Yes. An overview of the route is shown in the display. If you select No the saved route can be called up later in the navigation menu. X Start Start. Route guidance is started. Downloaded and saved data can be called up again via COMAND. You can find further information in the separate COMAND Operating Instructions. Speed alert You can define the upper speed limit, which must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a message will be sent to the Customer Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance Center then forwards this information to you. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call. The data you receive contains the following information: Rthe location where the speed limit was exceeded Rthe time at which the speed limit was exceeded Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded Geo fencing Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries of the selected areas. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call. The area can be determined as either a circle or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Different settings are possible for each area. These settings can be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and inform the customer service representative that you wish to activate geo fencing. Currently inactive areas can be activated by text message. Triggering the vehicle alarm With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off. Garage door opener General notes The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to oper- Features Rhave safety stop and reverse features and current U.S. federal safety standards Once programed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. When programing a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programing. Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programing the integrated garage door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services: Rmeet When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Programming Programming buttons Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 319). RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of charge) More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com. Notes on the declaration of conformity (Y page 26). USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 RCanada: Important safety notes G WARNING When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury. Garage door remote control A is not included with the integrated garage door opener. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to control the garage door drive. X To start programming mode: press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. The garage door opener is now in programming mode. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as button ;, = or ? is programmed for the first time. If the selected button has already been programmed, indicator Z Stowage and features ate up to three different door and gate systems. Use the integrated garage door opener only on garage doors that: 319 Stowage and features 320 Features lamp : will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed. X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X To program the remote control: point garage door remote control A towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm). X Press and hold button B on remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code. X Release button B on remote control A for the garage door drive system. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programing procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. Synchronizing the rolling code Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 319). If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronize the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will need to use the programming button on the door drive control panel. The programming button may be positioned at different locations depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling. Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro- gramming of additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps. Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Get out of the vehicle. X Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step. X Get into the vehicle. X Press previously programmed button ;, = or ? on the integrated garage door opener until the door closes. The rolling code synchronization is then complete. Notes on programming the remote control Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not recognized during programming. Comparable with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers also feature a "break". Proceed as follows: Rif you live in Canada you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when using the programming steps. X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Release the button. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. Rif Features Problems when programming If you are experiencing problems programing the integrated garage door opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of the following instructions: RCheck the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote control A and whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of the garage door drive remote control. The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that have units which operate in the frequency range of 280 to 433 MHz. RReplace the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control A will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener. RWhen programming, hold remote control A at varying distances and angles from the button which you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 2and 12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf another remote control is available for the same garage door drive, repeat the same programming steps with this remote control. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote control A. RNote that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button B on remote control A again before transmission ends. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission. Opening/closing the garage door After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Press button ;, = or ? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green. The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary. Clearing the memory Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. Z Stowage and features Press button B of garage door remote control A for two seconds, then release it for two seconds. X Press button B again for two seconds. X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code. X Release button B of remote control A of the garage door drive. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programming process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. X 321 Features 322 Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Press and hold buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green. X Release buttons ; and ?. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared. Stowage and features X Floormats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. Slide the relevant seat back. X To install: place the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;. X Remove the floormat. X 323 Useful information ............................ 324 Engine compartment ........................ 324 ASSYST PLUS .................................... 328 Maintenance and care Care .................................................... 329 324 Engine compartment Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all Maintenance and care models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Engine compartment off the ignition reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area Rremove jewelry and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts Hood G WARNING i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). Important safety notes G WARNING If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlatch the hood while driving. G WARNING When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood. Open and close the hood only when no one is within its range of movement. G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. Rswitch Rnever The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. If you touch components which are under voltage, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of injury. Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on. Opening the hood G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. Engine compartment ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood. 325 Radiator Do not cover up the radiator, such as with a thermal mat or insect protection cover. The readings of the on-board-diagnostic system may otherwise be inaccurate. Some of these readings are required by law and must be accurate at all times. General notes Example Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off. X Pull release lever : on the hood. The hood is released. X Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement. Rthe X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ; up and lift the hood. If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in (40 cm), the hood is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut. Closing the hood Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm). X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. X Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. Z Maintenance and care Engine oil Engine compartment 326 H Environmental note When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. Maintenance and care ! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service center. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: Example Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, add 1.0 l of engine oil. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil. X Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after the interval for replacement specified by the service system has been exceeded Rusing engine oil additives. ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off. Adding engine oil G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the components before starting the engine. Example Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Add engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 325). X Further information on engine oil (Y page 400). Additional service products Checking coolant level G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING The engine cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the engine is warm. When opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before opening the cap. Wear eye and hand protection when opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a turn to allow pressure to escape. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). or X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 157). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be below 158 ‡ (70 †). X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 (Y page 157) in the ignition lock. or X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counterclockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in expansion tank ;. X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. For further information on coolant, see (Y page 401). Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system X Park the vehicle on a level surface. G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Z 327 Maintenance and care Engine compartment ASSYST PLUS 328 Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 325). Maintenance and care G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab and open. X Add the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. X If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to add washer fluid (Y page 282). Further information on windshield washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 402). ASSYST PLUS Service message The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Maintenance Booklet). The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.: RService A in .. Days A Due RService A Overdue by .. Days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, indicates the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: RService X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. Hiding a service message X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. Care Switch on the ignition. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu and press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and press a to confirm. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. X Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Rif the engine is often left idling for long peri- ods Under these or similar conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter replaced or changed more frequently. Under arduous operating conditions, the tires must be checked more often. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Driving abroad Information about Service Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- play has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop. Have service work carried out as described in the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Special service requirements The specified maintenance interval takes only the normal operation of the vehicle into account. Under arduous operating conditions or increased load on the vehicle, maintenance work must be carried out more frequently, for example: Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi- ate stops Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances Care General notes H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: Rdry, rough or hard cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you Z Maintenance and care Displaying service messages 329 330 Care should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked. ! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk: Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Rusing a car wash Rusing a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Maintenance and care ! Make sure that the automatic transmis- sion is in neutral position N when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. ROperating with the SmartKey: Do not remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's door when the engine is switched off or at very low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission position D or R the automatic transmission will automatically switch to park position P and block the wheels. ROperating with the Start/Stop button: Do not open the driver's door when the engine is switched off or at very low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission position D or R the automatic transmission will automatically switch to park position P and block the wheels. Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts. ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed. Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off (the OFF button has been pressed). Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position 0. Rthe 360° camera or rear view camera is switched off. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in position N neutral: Operating with the SmartKey: Make sure that the ignition is switched on. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake, if necessary. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Care Make sure that the ignition is switched on. Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Engage park position P. X Release the brake pedal. X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (Y page 157). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X Switch on the ignition. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake, if necessary. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X X You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield. Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements in each country. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork. X Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as soon as possible when driving in winter. Power washers G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtires Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Rtrim Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. Relectrical Z Maintenance and care Operating with the Start/Stop button: 331 332 Care ! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk: Rusing a car wash a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Rusing Maintenance and care Cleaning the paintwork ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used. If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recommended and approved by MercedesBenz should be used. Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot. X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paintwork quickly and provisionally. Matte finish care ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine. ! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matte effect: RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable materials. RFrequent use of car washes. RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, spotted areas). Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish. The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care products. Care ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances prevent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. Cleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked. X Cleaning wiper blades G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. Cleaning the windows G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that is recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly. Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield. X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition. X Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses. Z Maintenance and care Cleaning the vehicle parts 333 Care 334 X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lights with a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Cleaning the mirror turn signals Maintenance and care ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Shutters : open automatically after approximately 120 seconds. X Clean the location points of shutters ; in the radiator trim with a power washer. X Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Cleaning AIRPANEL ! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Vehicles with AIRPANEL have shutters in the radiator trim. If the vehicle is very dusty, the adjustment range of the shutters may be restricted. The actuation mechanics of the radiator trim must then be cleaned with a power washer. X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the rear view camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera with a power washer. Care Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To open the cover of the 360° camera: with COMAND or Audio 20 activated, call up the vehicle menu: press the Ñ button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide ¬ the controller. X To select System Settings: Settings turn and press the controller. X To select the 360° camera camera: turn and press the controller. X To select Open camera cover: cover turn and press the controller. The cover of the 360° camera opens. X To clean the 360° camera: clean camera lens : with clean water and a soft cloth. 335 Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To open the cover of the rear view camera: with COMAND or Audio 20 activated, call up the vehicle menu: press the Ñ button. X To switch to the menu bar: slide ¬ the controller. X To select System Settings: Settings turn and press the controller. X To select Rear view camera: camera turn and press the controller. X To select Open camera cover: cover turn and press the controller. The rear view camera cover opens. X To clean the rear view camera: use clear water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. X Cleaning the 360° camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the 360° camera with a power washer.360 If you drive at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) or with the SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of the 360° camera closes automatically. Cleaning the exhaust pipes G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them. ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acidbased cleaning agents such as sanitary cleansers or wheel cleaners. Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. Z Maintenance and care X Care 336 X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change color temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. X Interior care Cleaning the display ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Maintenance and care Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. Rabrasive Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber cloth. X Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever X Cleaning genuine wood and trim elements ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. ! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces. If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. As a result, plastic parts may come loose in the event of air bag deployment. There is a risk of injury. Do not use any care products and cleaning agents to clean the cockpit. ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You can otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Care Cleaning the seat covers results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. General notes ! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean genuine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA covers. If used often, these can damage the cover. Genuine leather seat covers ! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions: RClean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop. Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for example: Rdifferences in the texture Rmarks caused by growth and injury Rslight nuances of color These are characteristics of leather and not material defects. Cleaning the seat belts G WARNING Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury. Never bleach or dye the seat belts. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †) or in direct sunlight. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. Cleaning the headliner and carpets Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Seat covers of other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning Z Maintenance and care Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time. 337 338 339 Useful information ............................ 340 Where will I find...? ........................... 340 Flat tire .............................................. 341 Battery (vehicle) ................................ 345 Jump-starting .................................... 349 Towing and tow-starting .................. 351 Roadside Assistance Fuses .................................................. 354 340 Where will I find...? Useful information Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified special- Roadside Assistance ist workshops (Y page 26). Where will I find...? Vehicle tool kit General notes The towing eye is located in the stowage well under the trunk floor. In vehicles with MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) the towing eye is located in a bracket under the parcel shelf. Apart from certain country-specific variations, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tire changing tools are required and approved to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tools required for changing a wheel may include, for example: RJack RWheel chock wrench RRatchet wrench RAlignment bolt RLug (Example) : Tire inflation compressor ; Tire sealant filler bottle = Towing eye Open the trunk lid. Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 305). X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 342). X X Vehicles with MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) : Towing eye To remove the towing eye: open the trunk lid. X Pull towing eye : to the left and remove it. X To replace the towing eye: slide towing eye : with the thread into the rear end of the bracket. X Push towing eye : on the eyelet towards the right until it engages in the bracket. X Flat tire Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) (Y page 341) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 340) Information on changing/mounting a wheel (Y page 381). X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 157). X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so. X Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) General notes With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. The affected tire must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking next to the tire size designation, the loadbearing capacity and the speed index (Y page 375). MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor. If the pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: RObserve the instructions in the display messages (Y page 277). RCheck the tire for damage. RIf driving on, observe the following notes. The maximum driving distance is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden and approximately 18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden. In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon: RSpeed RRoad condition temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The maximum permissible distance which can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). ROutside Roadside Assistance Flat tire 341 342 Flat tire When replacing one or all tires, make sure that you use only tires: Roadside Assistance Rof the size specified for the vehicle and Rmarked "MOExtended" If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tire). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of an accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. Rthe vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. RESP® is intervening constantly. are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. Rthere TIREFIT kit Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tire sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †). G WARNING In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above. wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Rthe G WARNING The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. Flat tire ! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. 343 Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out of the housing. X Screw hose A onto flange B of tire sealant bottle :. X Place tire sealant bottle : head downwards into recess ; of the tire inflation compressor. X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tire. X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. X Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation compressor from the stowage well underneath the trunk floor (Y page 340). X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire. X Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket (Y page 310) in your vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Press on/off switch = on the tire inflation compressor to I. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase. X Allow the tire inflation compressor to run for five minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). X If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure reached" (Y page 344). If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 344). Z Roadside Assistance Using the TIREFIT kit Flat tire 344 If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible. instrument cluster in the driver's field of vision. ! Residue from the tire sealant may come out of the filler hose after use. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. Tire pressure not reached If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been attained after five minutes: Switch off the tire inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m). X Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of five minutes the tire pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi). X Roadside Assistance X G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Tire pressure reached G WARNING A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant. The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the H Environmental note Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes: Switch off the tire inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor. X Pull away immediately. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure with the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). X X G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. i In cases such as the one mentioned above, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's Battery (vehicle) side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values. X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor. 345 have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting system, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rin X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pressure release button E next to pressure gauge F. When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire. X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the sealed tire. X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filler hose remains attached to the tire sealant bottle. X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire changed there. X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop. X Battery (vehicle) Important safety notes Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installing. You should therefore the event of abrupt steering maneuver and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. i For further information about ABS and ESP®, see (Y page 66) and (Y page 71). G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up. The highly flammable gas mixture forms when charging the battery as well as when jumpstarting. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A buildup of electrostatic charge can be caused, for example: Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers Rdue to friction between clothing and seats Z Roadside Assistance Rbraking 346 Battery (vehicle) Rif you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth Roadside Assistance G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified spe- cialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries. ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. ! You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. In the exceptional case that it is necessary for you to disconnect the battery yourself, make sure that: Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. Ryou switch off the engine and remove the SmartKey. Make sure the ignition is switched off. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic components, such as the alternator, may be damaged. Ryou first remove the negative terminal clamp and then the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. Rthe transmission is locked in position P after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle. The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be installed securely during operation. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion. Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery (vehicle) Keep children away. Observe this Operator's Manual. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information. Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time. Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. Charging the battery G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jumpstarting connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 349). X Open the hood. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 349). Z Roadside Assistance Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and faceguard. Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a physician if necessary. Wear eye protection. 347 Roadside Assistance 348 Battery (vehicle) Never charge the battery if it is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/ warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Jump-starting 349 Jump-starting For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment. G WARNING G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel. If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Roadside Assistance Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention. 350 Jump-starting Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: Roadside Assistance RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating. ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: Rthe jumper cables are not damaged. the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections. Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 157). All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 157). X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc. X Open the hood. Rwhen Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jumpstarting device. Towing and tow-starting 351 Slide cover A of positive terminal : in the direction of the arrow. Connect positive terminal : on your vehicle to positive terminal ; of donor battery B using the jumper cable. Always begin with positive terminal : on your own vehicle first. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal = of donor battery B to ground point ? of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery B first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes. X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point ? and negative terminal =, then from positive clamp : and positive terminal ;. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover A of positive clamp : after removing the jumper cables. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop. Towing and tow-starting G WARNING Important safety notes When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: G WARNING Functions relevant to safety are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe engine is not running. brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning. Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system. If your vehicle is being towed, much more force may be necessary to steer or brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, make sure that the steering moves freely. Rthe G WARNING You can no longer steer the vehicle if the steering wheel lock has been engaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch off the ignition when towing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. Rthe towing eye could detach itself vehicle/trailer combination could rollover. There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. Rthe ! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: Rwhen Rin towing the vehicle the car wash ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z Roadside Assistance X 352 Towing and tow-starting ! Secure the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eye only. Otherwise, the vehicle could become damaged. ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery purposes as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. Roadside Assistance ! Shift the automatic transmission to N and do not open the driver's or front passenger's door during towing. The automatic transmission may otherwise shift to position P, which could damage the transmission. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock Rcannot release the electric parking brake Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to position N Disarm the automatic locking feature before the vehicle is towed (Y page 88). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. Installing/removing the towing eye Installing the towing eye ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle. ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported. ! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 396). It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed away. If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed. If the automatic transmission cannot be shifted to position N, have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes are located in the bumpers. They are at the rear and at the front, under covers :. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit/stowage tray (Y page 340). X Press the mark on cover : inwards and remove. X Screw in and tighten the towing eye clockwise to the stop. Towing and tow-starting Unscrew and remove the towing eye. Attach cover : to the bumper and press until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit/ stowage tray. X X Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed with the rear axle raised. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. ! The ignition must be switched off if you are towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 127). X Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position. X If necessary, turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 0 and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle. X When towing your vehicle with the rear axle raised, it is important that you observe the safety instructions (Y page 351). Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground The automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points: Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. X X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 127). X In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps for the direction of travel flash. After resetting the combination switch, the hazard warning lamp starts flashing again. Transporting the vehicle ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. Z Roadside Assistance Removing the towing eye 353 Fuses 354 As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: Fuses Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the automatic transmission to position P. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Secure the vehicle. Important safety notes X Notes on 4MATIC vehicles Roadside Assistance ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is damaged, have the vehicle transported on a truck or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical system: if the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 349). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission. i You can find information on "Jump-starting" under (Y page 349). G WARNING If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating. Before changing a fuse Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 174). X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Make sure that the ignition is switched off (Y page 157). or X When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 157). X All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. Fuses RFuse box on the driver's side of the dashboard RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell RFuse box in the engine compartment on the driver's side RFuse box under the trunk floor on the righthand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the trunk (Y page 356). Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. X Open the front-passenger door. X Open the front-passenger door. To open: fold cover : out towards the rear and remove it. Dashboard fuse box ! Do not use a pointed object such as a screwdriver to open the cover in the dashboard. You could damage the dashboard or the cover. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. X X X To close: clip in cover : at the rear. Fold cover : forwards until it engages. Fuse box in the engine compartment Open the driver's door. To open: pull out cover : slightly at the bottom in the direction of arrow =. X Fold cover : outwards in the direction of arrow ;. X X X To close: fold in cover : until it engages. G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. Z Roadside Assistance The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: 355 Fuses 356 Open the hood. X To open: press safety clips : on the cover together. X Remove fuse box cover ; upwards. Roadside Assistance X Open the trunk lid. Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 305). X To open: swing cover : upwards in the direction of the arrow. X X X To close: fold down cover : in the opposite direction to the arrow. Make sure that the cover is in the recess provided for it. i The fuse allocation chart is located in a recess at the side of the fuse box. You can find the corresponding fuse rating and fuse type on the fuse allocation chart. Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box. X Loosen screws =, fold up fuse box lid ? and remove it. X To close: check whether the seal is positioned correctly in the lid ?. X Insert lid ? into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box. X Fold down lid ? of the fuse box and tighten screws =. X Fuse box in the trunk ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. 357 Useful information ............................ 358 Important safety notes .................... 358 Operation ........................................... 358 Winter operation ............................... 360 Check ................................................. 361 Loading the vehicle .......................... 369 All about wheels and tires ............... 373 Changing a wheel ............................. 381 Wheels and tires Wheel and tire combinations ........... 386 358 Operation Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). Tires with run-flat characteristics: Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics). Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: Rsuitability Rlegal Important safety notes Wheels and tires G WARNING If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct: stipulations recommendations Information on the dimensions and types of wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found in the "Wheel/tire combinations" section (Y page 386). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Rfactory Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar (Y page 369) Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap (Y page 172) Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 361) Rdesignation Rmodel When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rmodel G WARNING A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tires without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tire. replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Rimmediately Operation Information on driving If the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tire pressures and correct them if necessary. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Operation Regular checking of wheels and tires G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. Regularly check the wheels and tires of your vehicle for damage at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rcuts in the tires Rpunctures Rtears in the tires Rbulges on tires Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 359). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary (Y page 361). The service life of tires depends, among other things, on the following factors: RDriving style pressure RDistance covered RTire Important safety notes on the tire tread G WARNING Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. Minimum tire tread depth for: RSummer tires: â in (3 mm) tires: ã in (4 mm) For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached. RM+S Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once a tread depth of Z Wheels and tires When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls, may be damaged. 359 360 Winter operation approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced. Selecting, mounting and replacing tires Wheels and tires ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type and make. Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 341). ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tires which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). RReplace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a flat tire (Y page 341). i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Winter operation General notes Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 381). Driving with summer tires At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. M+S tires G WARNING M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident. M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately. At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro- Check Check the tire pressures (Y page 365). Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 369). X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 367). X X Snow chains G WARNING If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever install snow chains to the front wheels Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels. ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you mount snow chains on steel wheels, you may damage the hub caps. Remove the hub caps from the relevant wheels before mounting the snow chains. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality. If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: RSnow chains may not be mounted on all wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-tire combinations (Y page 386). ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to mount snow chains. RDo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). ROn vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains have been installed (Y page 197). You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pulling away with snow chains installed (Y page 72). You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). Check Tire pressure specifications Important safety notes G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Z Wheels and tires vide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tires will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted. When you have mounted the M+S tires: 361 362 Check Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel: Rmonthly, at least the load changes Rbefore beginning a long journey Runder different operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Wheels and tires Rif The specifications on the sample Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure tables are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle. General notes The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. Further information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed. Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted for this vehicle by the factory The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. Tire and Loading Information placard Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions : Recommended tire pressures The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 369). The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure information following is only valid for that tire size. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ. Check Rif you want to drive with an increased load and/or Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Important notes on tire pressure G WARNING If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. RCheck the tire for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure can be checked in the on-board computer. The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load. Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold. The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ 1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. Z Wheels and tires Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 375). If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values: 363 364 Check Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap Rhave Rbe an adverse effect on ride comfort more susceptible to damage Maximum tire pressures Underinflated or overinflated tires Wheels and tires Underinflated tires G WARNING Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel. : Example: maximum permissible tire pres- sure Underinflated tires may: Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 361). Roverheat, i The actual values for tires are vehicle- leading to tire defects affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption Radversely Overinflated tires G WARNING Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Overinflated tires may: Rincrease the braking distance Radversely affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Checking the tire pressures Important safety notes Observe the notes on tire pressure (Y page 361). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap Rin the "Tire pressure" section Check 365 Checking tire pressures manually To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows: Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked. X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. X Read the tire pressure and compare it with the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 361). X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to the recommended value. X If the tire pressure is too high, release air by pressing down the metal pin in the valve. Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then, check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. X Repeat these steps for the other tires. X General notes If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the correct sensors are installed on all wheels. Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the Service menu of the multifunction display; see illustration (example). Important safety notes G WARNING Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once every two weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if Z Wheels and tires Tire pressure monitor For information on the message display, refer to the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section (Y page 367). Wheels and tires 366 Check underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation (Y page 361). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires (Y page 367). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pressure drops significantly. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 361). The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers. The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display. Further information can be found on (Y page 277). If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning, it may take more than ten minutes for the tire pressure warning lamp to inform you of the malfunction by flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving. The tire pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Check Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the a button. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. Pressure X Press the a button. The current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the multifunction display. X If the vehicle has been parked for over 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message appears. After a teach-in process, the tire pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure value to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active display message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored. Tire pressure monitor warning messages If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display and the yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp comes on. RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low and must be corrected at the next opportunity. RIf the Check Tires message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly and the tires must be checked. RIf the Caution Tire Malfunction appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly and the tires must be checked. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tires" section (Y page 277). If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions. Restarting the tire pressure monitor When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also define reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values. X Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 361). Additional tire pressure values for different loads can also be found on the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (Y page 361). X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. Z Wheels and tires Checking the tire pressure electronically 367 Check 368 Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the a button. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. Pressure X Press the a button. The multifunction display shows the current tire pressure for the individual tires or the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message. X Press the : button. The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message appears in the multifunction display. X If you wish to confirm the restart: Wheels and tires X Press the a button. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. Radio type approval for the tire pressure monitor Country Radio type approval number USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A FCC ID: MRXGG4 FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4 Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A IC: 2546A-GG4 IC: 2546A-MC34MA4 Tire pressure loss warning system General notes While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display. You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message which appears in the Service menu of the multifunction display. Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system" section (Y page 369). Important safety notes The tire pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 361). The tire pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An even loss of pressure on several tires at the same time cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss warning system. The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers. The function of the tire pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's tires. Rroad Ryou conditions are wintry. are driving on sand or gravel. Loading the vehicle adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof). Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tire pressure the wheels or tires Rmounted new wheels or tires X Before restarting, make sure that the tire pressures are set properly on all four tires for the respective operating conditions. The recommended tire pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. X Also observe the notes in the section on tire pressures (Y page 361). X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the 9 or : button on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the a button. X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. Pressure X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message appears in the multifunction display. Rchanged If you wish to confirm the restart: Press the a button. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Yes. Yes X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tire pressures of all four tires. X If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. or If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears, use the 9 or : button to select Cancel Cancel. X Press the a button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. X Loading the vehicle Instruction labels for tires and loads G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permisZ Wheels and tires Ryou 369 Loading the vehicle 370 Information placard: "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage must not exceed the specified value. i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehiclespecific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Number of seats Wheels and tires sible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. : B-pillar, driver's side Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating Maximum number of seats : indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. X Specification for maximum gross vehicle weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading Loading the vehicle 371 Determining the correct load limit Step-by-step instructions Wheels and tires The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. Z 372 Loading the vehicle Example: steps 1 to 3 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 369). The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Step 1 Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 5 3 1 Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3 Front: 1 Rear: 2 Front: 1 Weight of the occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs Occupant 1: 150 lbs (91 kg) (68 kg) Occupant 2: 190 lbs (86 kg) Occupant 3: 150 lbs (68 kg) Gross weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) Wheels and tires Step 2 150 lbs (68 kg) All about wheels and tires 373 Step 3 Example 2 Example 3 Permissible load 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò (maximum gross vehi- 750 lbs (340 kg) = cle weight rating from 750 lbs (340 kg) the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 540 lbs (245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 150 lbs (68 kg) = 1350 lbs (612 kg) Vehicle identification plate All about wheels and tires Even if you have calculated the total cargo carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 369). Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maximum permissible weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and = temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America are provided with the corresponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire. Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum tire width. Z Wheels and tires Example 1 374 All about wheels and tires Example: RTreadwear grade: 200 grade: AA RTemperature grade: A All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades. RTraction i The actual values for tires are vehicle- specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Wheels and tires Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate conditions. Traction G WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train. The traction grades – from highest to lowest – are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. Observe the legally required minimum tire tread depth (Y page 359). Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires) (Y page 360). Temperature G WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. They represent the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. All about wheels and tires Overview : Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard (Y page 379) ; DOT, Tire Identification Number (Y page 378) Maximum tire load (Y page 377) Maximum tire pressure (Y page 364) Manufacturer Tire material (Y page 378) Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating (Y page 375) D Load index (Y page 377) E Tire name = ? A B C The markings described above are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating G WARNING Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. : ; = ? A B Tire width Nominal aspect ratio in % Tire code Rim diameter Load bearing index Speed rating General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description. If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "T" precedes the size description: these are compact emergency spare wheels at high tire pressure, to be used only temporarily in an emergency. Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire width in millimeters. Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect Z Wheels and tires Tire labeling 375 Wheels and tires 376 All about wheels and tires ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height. Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires. Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 369). Example: Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 377). For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (Y page 377). Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Summer tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) Index Speed rating S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). The service specification is made up of load-bearing index A and speed rating B. RIf the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). RThe size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed. All about wheels and tires All-weather tires and winter tires Index Speed rating Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) 377 Load index the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also have the i snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow. An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130mph (210km/h). The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "Tires" section (Y page 386). Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. In addition to the load-bearing index, load index : may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this after the letter that identifies the speed rating (Y page 375). RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire RLight Load: represents a light load tire RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Maximum load rating Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. 1 Or M+S i for winter tires. Z Wheels and tires i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide 378 All about wheels and tires Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 369). i The actual values for tires are vehicle- specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced. Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked with "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in 2008. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Wheels and tires Tire characteristics The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and manufacturing date A. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol : marks that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. For further information about retreaded tires, see (Y page 358). Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall : and under tire tread ;. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire ply composition and material used Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. Bar Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. All about wheels and tires Normal occupant weight The number of occupants for which the vehicle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs). Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S. government. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. Recommended tire pressures The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory. The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment The combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Speed rating The speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Maximum loaded vehicle weight The maximum weight is the sum of: Rthe curb weight of the vehicle weight of the accessories Rthe load limit Rthe weight of the factory installed optional equipment Rthe Kilopascal (kPa) Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely. Z Wheels and tires DOT (Department of Transportation) DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the U S Department of Transportation. 379 380 All about wheels and tires Curb weight The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum load rating The maximum load rating is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Wheels and tires Maximum permissible tire pressure Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch) A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. Aspect ratio Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked without direct sunlight on the tires for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) Tread The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Bead The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim. Sidewall The part of the tire between the tread and the bead. Weight of optional extras The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a highperformance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number) This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load bearing index The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire. Traction Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface. Treadwear indicators Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Changing a wheel Total load limit Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. Changing a wheel Flat tire The "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 341) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 341). Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center. If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 369) or the tire pressure monitor (Y page 367). Direction of rotation Rotating the wheels G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions. ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components. Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (Y page 381). The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions. Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is maintained. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation. Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. Mounting a wheel Preparing the vehicle Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. X Bring the front wheels into the straightahead position. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Z Wheels and tires Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions. 381 Changing a wheel 382 Make sure that in vehicles with AIRMATIC, the vehicle level is set to "Normal" (Y page 197). X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/ Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 157). X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. Wheels and tires X Fold both plates upwards :. Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. X X Securing the vehicle on level ground X On level ground: place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients X If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tire-change tool kit (Y page 340). The folding wheel chock is an additional safety measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. On light downhill gradients: place chocks or other suitable items in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle. Raising the vehicle G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack Changing a wheel ! The jack is designed exclusively for jack- ing up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged. Observe the following when raising the vehicle: RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehiclespecific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its loadbearing capacity due to the restricted height. RMake sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). RNever place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle. RDo not lie under the vehicle. RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid when the vehicle is raised. sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. Vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps: the wheel bolts are covered by a hub cap. Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove the hub cap. Two different variants can be installed. RMake Alloy wheel with plastic hub cap Vehicles with plastic hub cap: To remove: turn the center cover of hub cap : counter-clockwise and remove. X To install: before installing, ensure that hub cap : is in the open position. To do so, turn the center cover counter-clockwise. X Put hub cap : in position and turn the center cover clockwise until you feel and hear hub cap : engage. X Make sure that hub cap : is installed securely. X Alloy wheel with aluminum hub cap Vehicles with aluminum hub cap: Z Wheels and tires must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. 383 Changing a wheel 384 To remove: take socket ; and lug wrench = from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 340). X Position socket ; on hub cap :. X Attach lug wrench = to socket ; and loosen hub cap : counter-clockwise. X Remove hub cap :. X To install: before installing, check hub cap : and the wheel area for soiling and clean if necessary. X Put hub cap : in position and turn until it is in the right position. X Position socket ; on hub cap :. X Attach lug wrench = to socket ; and tighten hub cap :. The tightening torque must be 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). Wheels and tires X i Note that the hub cap should be tight- The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel housings and just in front of the rear wheel housings (arrows). Vehicles with AMG equipment: the vehicle has covers installed to protect the vehicle body next to the jacking points on the outer sills. ened to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the hub cap installed at a qualified specialist workshop. X X Vehicles with AMG equipment: fold cover ? upwards. X Position jack B at jacking point A. Using a lug wrench =, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. Changing a wheel X X 385 Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. Remove the wheel. Mounting a new wheel G WARNING Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point. Turn crank C clockwise until jack B sits completely on jacking point A and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn crank C until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. X Removing a wheel ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in. When mounting/removing wheels, and for as long as the wheels are removed, avoid applying any external force on the brake disks. This could impair the level of comfort when braking. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 381). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt. Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. X Z Wheels and tires X Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. Wheel and tire combinations 386 Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the trunk again. X Vehicles with AMG equipment: insert the cover into the outer sill. X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Observe the recommended tire pressure (Y page 361). X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight. X Unscrew the alignment bolt. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. Wheels and tires X Lowering the vehicle G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. When you are driving with the collapsible spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning system/the tire pressure monitor when the damaged wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tire pressure control system: all installed wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. When you are driving with the emergency spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning system cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Wheel and tire combinations General notes ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Wheel and tire combinations RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- tain AMG tires) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Overview of abbreviations used in the following tire tables: RBA: both axles front axle RRA: rear axle The recommended pressures for various operating conditions can be found: RFA: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard with the recommended tire pressures on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions (Y page 361). Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip the vehicle with: Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/ right) Rthe same type of tires at a given time (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 341). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. i Not all wheel and tire combinations are available at the factory for all countries. i On the following pages, you can find infor- mation on approved wheel rims and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter tires. Winter tires are not available at the factory as standard equipment or optional extras. If you would like to equip your vehicle with approved winter tires, you may also, in certain circumstances, require rims of the appropriate size. The size of the approved winter tires may deviate from that of the standard tires. This is dependent on the model and the equipment installed at the factory. The tires and wheel rims, as well as further information, can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Wheels and tires These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: 387 Wheel and tire combinations 388 Tires C 300 Summer tires R 17 Tires Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 W BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm) Wheels and tires R 18 Tires Wheels FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm) FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2, 3 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm) R 19 2 3 Tires Wheels FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL2 RA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL2, 3 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.22 in (56.5 mm) FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL2 RA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL2, 3 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm) Available as MOExtended. Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch). Wheel and tire combinations 389 All-weather tires R 17 Tires Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 H2 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm) Tires Wheels FA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL2 RA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm) FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm) Wheels and tires R 18 Winter tires R 17 Tires Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si2 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm) R 18 Tires Wheels BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si2 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) C 300 4MATIC Summer tires R 17 2 Tires Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 W BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm) Available as MOExtended. Z Wheel and tire combinations 390 R 18 Tires Wheels FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm) FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2, 3 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm) Wheels and tires R 19 Tires Wheels FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL2 RA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL2, 3 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.22 in (56.5 mm) FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL2 RA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL2, 3 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm) All-weather tires R 17 2 3 Tires Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 H2 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm) Available as MOExtended. Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch). Wheel and tire combinations 391 R 18 Tires Wheels FA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL2 RA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm) FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm) Tires Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si2 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm) Wheels and tires Winter tires R 17 R 18 Tires Wheels BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si2 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) C 400 4MATIC Summer tires R 17 2 Tires Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 W BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm) Available as MOExtended. Z Wheel and tire combinations 392 R 18 Tires Wheels FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm) FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2, 3 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm) Wheels and tires R 19 Tires Wheels FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL2 RA: 245/35 R19 93 Y XL2, 3 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.22 in (56.5 mm) FA: 225/40 R19 93 Y XL2 RA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL2, 3 FA: 7.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm) All-weather tires R 17 2 3 Tires Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 H2 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm) Available as MOExtended. Additional measures necessary (additional wheel-arch extension on rear wheel arch). Wheel and tire combinations 393 R 18 Tires Wheels FA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL2 RA: 245/40 R18 97 H XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.20 in (56 mm) FA: 225/45 R18 95 Y XL2 RA: 245/40 R18 97 Y XL2 FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.93 in (49 mm) Tires Wheels BA: 225/50 R17 94 H M+Si2 BA: 7.0 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.91 in (48.5 mm) Wheels and tires Winter tires R 17 R 18 2 Tires Wheels BA: 225/45 R18 95 H XL M+Si2 BA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.73 in (44 mm) Available as MOExtended. Z 394 395 Useful information ............................ 396 Information regarding technical data .................................................... 396 Identification plates ......................... 396 Service products and filling capacities ..................................................... 397 Technical data Vehicle data ...................................... 403 Identification plates 396 Useful information i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) ; VIN = Vehicle model Information regarding technical data i The data stated here specifically refers to Technical data a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) ; VIN = Paint code i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate. X Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Service products and filling capacities VIN 397 Service products and filling capacities Important safety notes G WARNING Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering ; upwards. The VIN is visible :. X The VIN can also be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 396). The VIN can also be found at the lower edge of the windshield (Y page 397). Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner. Service products include the following: RFuels Engine number RBrake fluid RWindshield washer fluid control system refrigerant Components and service products must be matched. Only use products recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of products which have not been recommended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in the appropriate section. Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at an authorized MercedesBenz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: RClimate : Emission control information plate, including the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards ; Engine number (stamped into the crankcase) = VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in RMB Z Technical data RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) RCoolant 398 Service products and filling capacities accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Other identifications, for example: R0 W-30 R5 W-30 R5 W-40 Fuel Tank capacity Model Total capacity All models Model Of which reserve All models Approx. 1.8 US gal (7.0 l) Important safety notes Technical data G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel. 17.4 US gal (66.0 l) Gasoline Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/ 95 RON. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat- ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine failure. ! Do not use the following: RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol) (100% ethanol) RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol) RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol) RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) RGasoline with metalliferous additives RDiesel Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. Do not use additives. Otherwise, engine damage may RE100 Service products and filling capacities ! To ensure the longevity and full performance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used. If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline of a lower grade, observe the following precautions: ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible. RDo not drive at the maximum speed. RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3,000 rpm. You will usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance. i For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop or visit http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. C 300 4MATIC: as a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 88 AKI/93 RON. All other models: as a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower AKI. Information on refueling (Y page 172). Additives ! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use branded fuels that have additives. The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the injection system as a result. In such cases, and in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gasoline may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Fuel consumption information H Environmental note CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scientists believe to be principally responsible for global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Rdriving style Rother non-technical factors, such as environmental influences, road conditions or traffic flow You can minimize your vehicle's CO2 emissions by driving carefully and having it serviced regularly. The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in the following situations: Rat Rin very low outside temperatures city traffic Z Technical data occur. This does not include cleaning additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Gasoline may only be mixed with cleaning additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 399 400 Service products and filling capacities Filling capacities Ron Rin short journeys mountainous terrain The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. Model Engine oil General notes ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a Technical data specification other than is necessary to fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise cause engine damage or damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment. Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change. Otherwise, you may damage the engine and the exhaust gas aftertreatment. When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 397). The engine oils are matched to the performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems. For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Model Engin e model MB Approval C 300 C 300 4MATIC 274 229.3, 229.5, 229.51, 229.52 C 400 4MATIC 276 229.5 AMG vehicles 177 229.5 i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers. Capacity C 300 C 300 4MATIC 7.4 qt (7.0 l) C 400 4MATIC 6.9 qt (6.5 l) Additives ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. This could damage the engine. Engine oil viscosity Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this means that it is thick; a low viscosity means that it is thin. Select an engine oil with an SAE classification (viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside temperatures. The table shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The lowtemperature characteristics of engine oils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore strongly recommended that you carry out regular oil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE classification. Service products and filling capacities G WARNING The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. You should have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 397). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Coolant Important safety notes G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you add antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Rcorrosion protection protection Rraising the boiling point If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 266 ‡ (130 †). The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rantifreeze Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1. The coolant is checked with every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures Z Technical data Brake fluid 401 402 Service products and filling capacities adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. At temperatures above freezing: X i The coolant is checked with every maintenance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. Filling capacities Capacity C 300 C 300 4MATIC 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) C 400 4MATIC 11.5 US qt (10.9 l) i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze. Windshield/headlamp cleaning system Important safety notes Technical data Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. At temperatures below freezing: X Model G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. ! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged. ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked. Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. For the correct mixing ratio refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir. i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Climate control system refrigerant Important safety notes The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R‑134a. The instruction label regarding the refrigerant type used can be found on the radiator cross member. ! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate control system may be damaged. Service work, such as topping up refrigerant or replacing components, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations must be adhered to, SAE standard J639 included. Always have work on the climate control system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle data Refrigerant instruction label 403 Vehicle data General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe Example: refrigerant instruction label : Warning symbol ; Refrigerant filling capacity = Applicable standards ? PAG oil part number A Type of refrigerant heights specified may vary as a result of: - tires - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload. Dimensions and weights Warning symbol : advises you about: Rpossible dangers service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop Filling capacities Model Refrigerant All models 22.2 ± 0.4 oz (630 ± 10 g) Model All models PAG oil 2.8 oz (80 g) Model : Opening height C 300 69.6 in (1768 mm) All other models 69.8 in (1774 mm) All models Vehicle length 184.5 in (4686 mm) Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 79.5 in (2020 mm) Wheelbase 111.8 in (2840 mm) Turning radius 36.8 ft (11.22 m) Z Technical data Rhaving 404 Vehicle data Technical data All models Maximum roof load 165 lb (75 kg) Maximum trunk load 220 lb (100 kg) Model Vehicle height C 300 57.0 in (1447 mm) All other models 57.2 in (1452 mm)